492990
180
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/182
Next page
User's Manual
Advanced
This manual supports the following models:
MB441, MB451, MB451w, MB461, MB461+LP, MB471
MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4161 MFP
ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb
-2-
Contents
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Terms in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Symbols in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Legends used in this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1 Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Useful Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sorting Copies (Sort) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Combining Multiple Pages Onto One Sheet of Paper (N-in-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Making Multiple Copies Onto One Sheet of Paper (Repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Copying ID Cards (ID Card Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Erasing Edge Shadows (Edge Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting Margins (Margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Copying Different Size Documents (Mixed Size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Note for Using Multiple Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Functions That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Disabling a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2 Faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Useful Operations for Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Transmitting Duplex Documents (DuplexScan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Changing Where Documents Are Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Changing the Sender Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Setting Prefix (PreFix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Registering a Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Using a Prefix When Transmitting Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Using a Prefix When Registering a Number to Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Various Functions for Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Automatic Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Manual Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Transmission in Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Transmission to Multiple Destinations (Broadcast). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Transmission at a Specified Time (Set Tx time). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Fcode Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Registering Fcode Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Transmission Using a Sub Address (Fcode Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Reception Using a Sub Address (Fcode Polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Storing Documents in a Bulletin Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Contents
-3-
Printing Stored Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Deleting Stored Bulletin Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Deleting Fcode Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Security Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Security Functions at Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
ID Check Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Checking Broadcast Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Pressing Dial Twice (Confirm Dial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Various Settings for Fax Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
When Received Image is Larger Than Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Specifying a Reduction Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Specifying a Reduction Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Changing Soft Ringer Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Forwarding Received Faxes As Fax Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Registering a Forwarding Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Setting waiting time for a response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Faxing From a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Sending a Fax From a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Adding a Fax Number to the Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Grouping Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Sending a Fax to a Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Attaching a Cover Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Canceling a Fax Job From a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Exporting and Importing Phone Book Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Associating New Definition With Phone Book Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Scan To FaxServer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Enabling the Scan To FaxServer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Customizing the destination
e-mail address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Customizing the e-mail text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3 Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Advanced Operations for Scanning to E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Setting Sender and Reply to Addresses (From/Reply to) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Creating Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Registering a Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Registering Body Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Using a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Advanced Operations for Scanning, Internet Faxing and Scanning to
Fax Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Specifying the File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Contents
-4-
Changing the Scan Size (Scan Size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Changing the Resolution (Document Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Adjusting the Density (Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Specifying the File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Encrypting PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Setting the Compression Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Setting the Grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Using Drivers and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using TWAIN Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using WIA Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using ICA Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using ActKey Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Useful Functions for Internet Faxing and Scan To E-mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Enabling MDN and DSN Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Enabling MDN Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Useful Functions for Scanning to Local and Remote PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Setting PC Scan Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Enabling the Network TWAIN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Enabling the WSD Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Selecting the Dual-Side Scan of WSD Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4 Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Manual Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Printing on Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Printing on Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Printing on Custom Size Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Combining Multiple Pages Onto One Sheet of Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Making Duplex Prints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Scaling to Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Collating Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Setting the Page Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Booklet Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Cover Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Changing Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Emphasizing Fine Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Auto Tray Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Auto Tray Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Saving Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Secure Printing (for MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only) . . . 63
Contents
-5-
Encrypted Secure Printing
(for MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Watermark Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Overlay Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Storing Print Data
(for MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Saving the Driver Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Changing the Driver's Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Using Printer Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Using Computer Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Printing to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Printing E-mail Attached Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Downloading PS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Printing Out PS Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Changing Emulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5 Job Macro (for MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only) . . . . . . . . . 70
JOB MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Creating a Macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Editing the Title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Deleting a Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6 Configuring at the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Changing the Equipment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Admin Setup or Easy Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Other Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Checking the Current Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
List of the Device Setting Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Device Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
List of Each Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Paper Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Network Scan Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Store Document Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
View Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Easy Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Contents
-6-
Wireless Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Admin Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7 Useful Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
List of Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Installing Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Utilities common to Windows/Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Webpage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
PS Gamma Adjuster Utility (for MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/MB491/
MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb) . . . . . . . . . . 109
Registering Halftone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Printing a File With the Adjusted Gamma Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Windows Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Configuration Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
PDF Print Direct (for MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Print Job Accounting Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Operator Panel Language Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Network Card Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
OKI LPR Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Network Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
TELNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Mac OS X Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Panel Language Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Print Job Accounting Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Network Card Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Network Scanner Setup Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
8 Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Network Setting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Configuring the wireless LAN from the Web Page
(MB451w/MB471w only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
IEEE802.1X settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Wireless LAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Encrypting Communication by SSL/TLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Encrypting Communication by IPSec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Controlling Access Using IP Address (IP Filtering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Control Access Using MAC Address (MAC Address Filtering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Error Notification by E-mail (E-mail Alert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Contents
-7-
Using SNMPv3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Using IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Using IEEE802.1X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Configuring LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Configuring Secure Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Printing Without Printer Driver (Direct Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Changing Settings on EtherTalk (for Mac OS only) (MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/
MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only). . . . . . . . . . .165
Other Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Initializing Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Using DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
9 Settings for Auto Delivery and Transmission Data Save
Functions (for MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Forwarding Received Data As Digital Data (Auto Delivery) . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Configuration for the Auto Delivery Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Saving Transmission and Reception Data (Transmission Data Save). . . . . . 171
Configuration for the Transmission Data Save Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
10 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Initializing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Initializing an SD memory card (for MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Initializing Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Resetting the Machine Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Deleting or Updating the Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Deleting a Printer or Fax Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Updating a Printer or Fax Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Deleting a Scanner Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Updating a Scanner Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
11 Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
About Using Print Job Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Number of Job Account IDs and logs that can be used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
-8-
About This Manual
Terms in this document
The following terms are used in this manual:
Note
Indicates important information on operations. Make sure to read them.
Memo
Indicates additional information on operations. You are recommended to read them.
Reference
Indicates where to look when you want to know more detailed or related information.
Symbols in this document
The following symbols are used in this guide:
WARNING
Indicates additional information which, if ignored or failed to follow the guidelines, may result in personal fatal
injury or death.
CAUTION
Indicates additional information which, if ignored, may result in personal injury.
Symbols Description
[ ] Indicates menu names on the display screen.
Indicates menu, window, dialog names on the computer.
" " Indicates file names on the computer.
Indicates reference titles.
< > key Indicates a hardware key on the operator panel or a key on
the keyboard of the computer.
> Indicates how to get to the menu you want on the menu of
the machine or the computer.
-9-
Legends used in this manual
In this document, it may have written as follows.
PostScript3 Emulation PSE, POSTSCRIPT3 Emulation, POSTSCRIPT3 EMULATION
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
8 64-bit Edition operating system Windows 8 (64bit version)
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2012 64-bit Edition operating system Windows Server 2012
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 64-bit Edition operating system Windows 7 (64bit version)
Microsoft
®
Windows Vista
®
64-bit Edition operating system Windows Vista (64bit version)
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2008 R2 64-bit Edition operating system Windows Server 2008 R2
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2008 64-bit Edition operating system Windows Server 2008 (64bit version)
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP x64 Edition operating system Windows XP (x64 version)
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2003 x64 Edition operating system Windows Server 2003 (x64 version)
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
8 operating system Windows 8
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 operating system Windows 7
Microsoft
®
Windows Vista
®
operating system Windows Vista
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2008 operating system Windows Server 2008
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP operating system Windows XP
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2003 operating system Windows Server 2003
Generic name for Windows 8, Windows Server 2012, Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows
XP, and Windows Server 2003 Windows
Web Services on Devices WSD
If there is no special description, 64bit version is included in Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista,
Windows Server 2008, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. (64bit version and Windows Server
2008 R2 is included in Windows Server 2008.)
If there is no special description, Windows 7 is used as Windows, Mac OS X 10.7 is used as Mac OS X,
and MB491 is used as the machine for examples in this document.
Depending on your OS or model, the description on this document may be different.
-10-
1. Copying
This chapter explains your machine's various copy functions.
Useful Functions
This section explains your machine's useful copy functions. The functions explained below are enabled
from the [Change settings] menu of the copy start screen.
Memo
The following procedures are explained under the assumption that [Continuous Scan] is disabled. For the basic procedures
when [Continuous Scan] is enabled, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Sorting Copies (Sort)
When the sort function is enabled, data is
outputted by making one copy according to page
number. Since the machine collates copies, this
function saves you the effort of sorting copies
manually. In the factory default, the sort function
is not enabled.
1 Press the <COPY> key.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Press the to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
4 Press the to select [Sort] and then
press .
5 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
6 Press the until the copy standby screen
appears.
7 Enter the number of copies required.
8 Press .
Reference
The continuous scan mode allows you to copy multiple
documents at once. You can use both the ADF and
document glass for a single job if you use the continuous
scan mode. For details, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Combining Multiple Pages
Onto One Sheet of Paper (N-
in-1)
This function allows you to copy multiple pages
of documents onto one side of a single sheet of
paper. Two or four pages can be printed onto one
side.
Two pages
Four pages Vertical setting
Four pages Horizontal setting
Note
Place your document so that the top is scanned in first.
Specify the appropriate orientation of the image in
[Direction] to get the copy result you want.
[Zoom] is automatically set to [Auto] when [N-in-1] is
enabled. To specify the desired zoom ratio, set [N-in-1]
first and then set [Zoom].
OK
OK
The direction to inserting a document
The direction to inserting a documentt
The direction to inserting a document
Useful Functions
-11-
Copying
1
A part of the document image may be missing on the copy
depending on paper, document, and zoom ratio.
The paper tray is automatically selected when [
N-in-1
] is
enabled.
Reference
For details on how to load your document, refer to the
User's Manual Basic.
1 Press the <COPY> key.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Press the to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
4 Press the to select [N-in-1] and then
press .
5 Press the to select a value and then
press .
6 Press the until the copy standby
screen appears.
7 Enter the number of copies required.
8 Press .
Memo
When you use the document glass, the continuous scan
mode is automatically enabled. Follow the instructions
displayed on the display screen.
Reference
The continuous scan mode allows you to copy multiple
documents at once. You can use both the ADF and
document glass for a single job if you use the continuous
scan mode. For details, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Making Multiple Copies Onto
One Sheet of Paper (Repeat)
This function allows you to repeatedly copy the
image on a document onto one side of a single
sheet of paper. Images can be repeated two or
four times.
Two repeat
Four repeat
Note
[Zoom] is automatically set to [Auto] when [Repeat] is
enabled. To specify the desired zoom ratio, set [Repeat]
first and then set [Zoom].
Specify the appropriate orientation of the image in
[Direction] to get the copy result you want.
A part of the document image may be missing on the copy
depending on paper, document, and zoom ratio.
The paper tray is automatically set when this function is
enabled.
1 Press the <COPY> key.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Press the to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
4 Press the to select [Repeat] and then
press .
5 Press the to select a value and then
press .
6 Press the until the copy standby
screen appears.
7 Enter the number of copies required.
8 Press .
Reference
The continuous scan mode allows you to copy multiple
documents at once. You can use both the ADF and
document glass for a single job if you use the continuous
scan mode. For details, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
Useful Functions
-12-
Copying ID Cards (ID Card
Copy)
This function allows you to copy both sides
of an ID card, such as a driver's license,
onto one side of a piece of paper.
Note
You cannot use the ADF for this ID Card Copy function.
The area of 2mm from the edge of the document glass is
the scan margin.
The machine scans an area half the size of the specified
paper. If the document is more than half the size of the
paper size, the excess part is discarded.
1 Press the <COPY> key.
2 Press the to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
3 Press the to select [ID Card Copy]
and then press .
4 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
5 Press the until the copy start screen
appears.
6 Place your card with the front side face
down on the document glass.
7 Enter the number of copies.
8 Press .
9 When the [Please set back side of
document.] screen is displayed, place
your card with the back side face down
on the document glass.
10 Check that [Start Scan] is selected and
then press .
Erasing Edge Shadows (Edge
Erase)
When you copy a document with the document
cover open or when you copy a book, the edges
may be printed as black shadows.
This function allows you to erase such shadows.
Reference
You can set [Edge Erase] as a default so that you do not
have to perform the following procedure every time you
make copies. For details, refer to "View Information" P. 81.
1 Press the <COPY> key.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Press the to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
4 Press the to select [Edge Erase] and
then press .
5 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
6 Enter a value for width using the ten-key
pad and then press .
7 Press the until the copy standby
screen appears.
8 Enter the number of copies.
9 Press .
Setting Margins (Margin)
This margin function allows you to set the
margins. This is useful when you staple or punch
holes in copies. You can set the top, right,
bottom, or left margin by specifying the [Top]
and [Left] values.
Note
A part of the document image may be missing on the copy.
The specified margin values stay the same even when you
change the zoom ratio.
Specify the appropriate orientation of the image in
[Direction] to get the copy result you want.
Reference
You can set [Margin] as a default so that you do not have
to perform the following procedure every time you make
copies. For details, refer to "View Information" P. 81.
When Making Simplex Copies
1 Press the <COPY> key.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Press the to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
4 Press the to select [Margin] and then
press .
5 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
OK
OK
Useful Functions
-13-
Copying
1
6 Press the or to specify the [Top]
margin for [Front] and then press the .
- To create a margin at the top of the output,
specify a positive value.
- To create a margin at the bottom of the output,
specify a negative value.
7 Press or to specify the [Left]
margin for [Front] and then press .
- To create a margin on the left side of the output,
specify a positive value.
- To create a margin on the right side of the output,
specify a negative value.
Memo
You do not have to specify the [Back] margin when
copying on a single side.
8 Press the until the copy start screen
appears.
9 Enter the number of copies.
10 Press .
Memo
[Margin] is disabled when all the values are set to [0].
When Making Duplex Copies
When you make duplex copies with [Margin]
enabled, you must specify the [Back] margin.
1 Press the <COPY> key.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Specify [Duplex Copy] as you want.
Reference
For details, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
4 Press the to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
5 Press the to select [Margin] and then
press .
6 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
7 Press the or to specify the [Top]
margin for [Front] and then press the .
- To create a margin at the top of the output,
specify a positive value.
- To create a margin at the bottom of the output,
specify a negative value.
8 Press or to specify the [Left]
margin for [Front] and then press
the .
- To create a margin on the left side of the output,
specify a positive value.
- To create a margin on the right side of the output,
specify a negative value.
9 Press or to specify the [Top]
margin for [Back] and then press the .
- To create a margin at the top of the output,
specify a negative value.
- To create a margin at the bottom of the output,
specify a positive value.
Memo
Specify the same absolute value set in the [Top]
margin for both the [Front] and [Back] margins.
10 Press the or to specify the [Left]
margin for [Back] and then press .
- To create a margin on the left side of the output,
specify a negative value.
- To create a margin on the right side of the output,
specify a positive value.
Memo
Specify the same absolute value set in the [Left]
margin for both the [Front] and [Back] margins.
11 Press the until the copy standby
screen appears.
12 Enter the number of copies.
13 Press .
Memo
The position of margin is according to [Direction] of the
document.
If [Direction] of the document image is [Portrait], the
short edges are located in top and bottom edges, and long
edges are located in the right and left edges. If
[Direction] of the document image is [Landscape], the
long edges are located in right and left edges and the short
edges are located in the top and bottom edges.
When you use the document glass, the continuous scan
mode is automatically enabled. Follow the instructions
displayed on the display screen.
[Margin] is disabled when all the values are set to [0].
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
Useful Functions
-14-
Copying Different Size
Documents (Mixed Size)
When you use the ADF, you can copy multiple
documents having the same width but different
lengths at the same time onto their respective
paper sizes.
Note
You can use this function only when the document is a
combination of letter and legal 13.5 or of letter and legal
14.
When Enabling [Mixed Size], [Paper Feed] is set to
[Auto], a paper tray corresponding to a document is fed
and [Paper Feed] cannot be selected.
[Mixed Size] is available only when [Zoom] is set to [Fit
to page(98%)] or [100%].
You cannot set [Edge Erase] and [Mixed Size] at the
same time.
Enable more than one paper tray by pressing the
<SETTING> key and then selecting [Paper Setup]>
[Select Tray]>[Copy] to use this function.
When you use the MP tray, load paper in the MP tray first
and then enter the [Mixed Size] menu.
Memo
You can use only standard paper for this function.
In this section Tray1 and MP tray are used, and Legal 14 is
loaded in Tray1 and Letter is loaded in MP tray as an
example.
1 Load Legal 14 in Tray1 and Letter in MP
tray.
2 Press the <SETTING> key.
3 Press the to select [Paper Setup] and
then press .
4 Select [Legal 14] for [Paper Size] of
Tray1 and [Letter] for [Paper Size] of
MP tray.
5 Press until the top screen appears.
6 Press the <COPY> key.
7 Place your documents with mixing Letter
and Legal 14 sizes in the ADF.
8 Press the to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
9 Press the to select [Mixed Size] and
then press .
10 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
11 Press the until the copy standby
screen appears.
12 Check that the following settings are
displayed on the start screen.
13 Enter the number of copies.
14 Press .
Note for Using Multiple
Functions
Functions That Cannot Be Used
Simultaneously
Some functions cannot be used in combination
with other functions. If you try to select
incompatible functions, a message indicating that
you cannot select the function appears.
For example, when you have specified [Margin],
you cannot specify [N-in-1] and [Repeat].
Of functions displayed in the message, disable
unnecessary functions and then try to set a
function you want to use again.
Memo
Some functions cannot be used with others.
Disabling a Function
To disable one of the functions, return the
function's setting to the default.
1 Press the <COPY> key.
2 Press the to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
3 Press the to select the function you
want to disable and then press .
4 Press the to select the default value
and then press .
5 Press the until the copy standby
screen appears.
Memo
When the default setting has been changed from the
factory default, select the default setting after changing
should be selected.
Reference
For the default value of each function, refer to "View
Information" P. 81.
[Mixed Size]: ON
[Paper Feed]: Auto
[Zoom]: 100%
[Scan size]: Legal 14
OK
OK
OK
MONO
When selecting [Margin]
you cannot specify [N-in-1]/
[Repeat].
OK
OK
-15-
Faxing
2
2. Faxing
This chapter explains your machine's useful fax functions and operations.
Useful Operations for Transmission
This section explains useful operations for fax transmission.
Memo
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Reference
For details on how to specify a destination, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
For details on how to load your documents in the ADF or on the document glass, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Transmitting Duplex
Documents (DuplexScan)
You can transmit duplex documents by using the
ADF.
Note
You cannot use the document glass for this procedure.
1 Place your document in the ADF.
2 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key.
3 Check that [Fax] is selected and then
press to open the fax start screen.
4 Press the to select [Fax Functions]
and then press .
5 Press the to select [Duplex Scan]
and then press .
6 Press the to select a scanning method
and then press .
You can specify [Long edge bind] or [Short
edge bind].
7 Press the until the fax standby screen
appears.
8 Specify a destination.
9 Press to start transmission.
Changing Where Documents
Are Loaded
You can use both the ADF and the document
glass when scanning documents for a fax job.
This allows you to send both a document and a
part of a book as one fax.
1 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key.
2 Check that [Fax] is selected and then
press to open the fax start screen.
3 Press the to select [Fax Functions]
and then press .
4 Press the to select [Continuous
Scan] and then press .
5 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
6 Press the until the fax standby screen
appears.
7 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
8 Specify a destination.
9 Press .
10 When the [Start Scan] screen appears,
place the next document with text face
up in the ADF or face down on the
document glass.
11 Make sure [Start Scan] is selected and
then press .
12 Repeat steps 10 and 11 as necessary for
each document you want to fax.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
OK
Useful Operations for Transmission
-16-
13 When all the documents are scanned,
press the to select [Scan Complete]
and then press .
Reference
For details on how to stop scanning and to cancel
transmission, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Changing the Sender Name
You can specify the sender name to be printed on
faxes you send. You must register a Sender
name in advance.
Reference
Check that [Sender name] is enabled before using the
following functions. For details, refer to the User's Manual
Basic.
Registering a Sender Name
You can register up to three sender names.
Memo
In the initial fax settings described in the User's Manual
Basic, you specify [Sender ID], which is automatically
registered to [Sender name 1].
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [User Install] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [TTI Register/
Edit] and then press .
7 Press the to select a sender's number
and then press .
8 Enter a name up to 22 characters.
9 Select [Enter] and then press .
10 Press the until the start screen appears.
Changing the Sender Name Printed
on a Fax
By default, the standard sender name is printed
on faxes when you enable [Sender Name]. To
use a sender name other than the standard
sender name, perform the following procedure.
1 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key.
2 Check that [Fax] is selected and then
press to open the fax start screen.
3 Press the to select [Fax Functions]
and then press .
4 Press the to select [TTI Select] and
then press .
5 Press the to select a sender name you
wan to use and then press .
6 Press the until the fax standby screen
appears.
Changing the Standard Sender
Name
If you use a sender name frequently, we
recommend to specify it as the standard sender
name.
Memo
In the initial fax settings described in the User's Manual
Basic, you specify [Sender ID]. By default, this value is
used as the standard sender name.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [User Install] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Standard TTI]
and then press .
7 Press the to select a name you want
to use and then press .
8 Press the until the start screen
appears.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Useful Operations for Transmission
-17-
Faxing
2
Setting Prefix (PreFix)
You can add a prefix to a destination number. You
can also attach a prefix when registering a number
to speed dial.
Registering a Prefix
You must register the prefix to [PreFix] in
advance. You can register up to 40 digits.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Other Settings]
and then press .
7 Press the to select [Prefix] and then
press .
8 Enter a prefix.
9 Select [Enter] and then press .
10 Press the until the top screen appears.
Reference
You can use symbols such as # and *. For details, refer to
the User's Manual Basic.
Using a Prefix When Transmitting
Faxes
You can attach a prefix only when you enter a
destination number using the ten-key pad.
Perform the following procedures when
specifying a destination using the ten-key pad.
1 On the destination entry screen, press
the and to select [PreFix:N] and
then press .
The area code is displayed as "N".
2 Enter a destination number.
3 Select [Enter] and then press .
Memo
You cannot enter a prefix and then use speed dial.
Using a Prefix When Registering a
Number to Speed Dial
You can attach a prefix to a speed dial number.
Perform the following procedures to register a
number to speed dial.
Reference
For details on how to register a number to speed dial, refer
to the User's Manual Basic.
1 On the fax number entry screen to
register a number to speed dial, press
the and to select [PreFix:N] and
then press .
The area code is displayed as "N".
2 Enter a fax number.
3 Select [Enter] and then press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Various Functions for Transmission
-18-
Various Functions for Transmission
This section explains various functions for fax transmission.
Memo
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Reference
For details on how to specify a destination, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Redialing
Automatic Redialing
The machine automatically redials if the first fax
transmission fails. Redial is automatically done
when the recipient machine is busy or does not
answer, or when a communication error happens.
To set the number of redial attempts and their
interval, perform the following procedures.
Memo
When the transmission failed though the machine tried
redials for the specified times, the document stored in
memory is erased and an error message is printed out.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Other Settings]
and then press .
7 Check that [Redial Tries] is selected
and then press .
8 Press to specify the desired number of
redial attempts and then press .
9 Press the to select [Redial Interval]
and then press .
10 Specify the desired redial interval using
the ten-key pad and then press .
11 Press the until the top screen appears.
Manual Redialing
To redial manually, specify the desired
destination from the transmission history.
Destination can be also selected by pressing the
REDIAL key.
Reference
For details on the transmission history, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
Transmission in Real Time
The scanned fax data is stored in memory before
the machine starts transmission. This is called
memory transmission. The fax data is
transmitted while it is scanned. This is called real
time transmission.
Real time transmission
The real time transmission is a method to
transmit data to a destination party without
storing document data in memory. In this mode,
transmission starts right after the transmission
operation, and this allows you to check that the
fax is transmitted to its destination.
Memory transmission
The memory transmission is a method to
transmit after storing document data in memory.
In this mode, you do not have to wait for the
machine to finish transmission.
The factory default is set to the memory
transmission.
To enable the real time transmission, perform the
following operation.
Note
You can scan only a single page when using the document
glass for real time transmission.
While you send a fax by using real time transmission, other
jobs using the ADF and document glass cannot be done.
1 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key.
2 Check that [Fax] is selected and press
to open the fax start screen.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Various Functions for Transmission
-19-
Faxing
2
3 Press the to select [Fax Functions]
and then press .
4 Press the to select [Memory Tx] and
then press .
5 Press the to select [OFF] and then
press .
6 Press the until the fax standby screen
appears.
7 Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
8 Specify a destination.
9 Press .
Manual Transmission
Manual sending (On-hook dial)
Press the <FAX/HOOK> key and confirm the
receiving tone of the destination, then send.
1 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key to light up
in blue.
2 Set the document on the auto document
feeder or document glass.
3 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key and input
the fax number of the destination.
4 Set the fax function as necessary.
5 After the receiving tone (peep) of the
destination is heard, press the Mono
start key to start sending.
You can transmit faxes manually when the
recipient uses manual reception mode or when
you want to send a fax after talking on the phone.
Note
You can scan only a single page when using the document
glass for manual transmission.
You need to connect an external telephone to the machine
to send faxes manually.
The following functions are unavailable in manual
transmission:
- broadcast
- transmission at the specified time
- Fcode transmission
- ID check transmission
- check broadcast destinations
- (Pressing Dial Twice confirm dial)
Memo
You do not have to disable memory transmission.
Even if the start screen other than the fax functions is
displayed in the machine, you can perform manual
transmission by lifting the handset.
1 Pick up the handset.
2 Dial a number.
3 Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
4 Configure the fax functions if necessary.
5 When you hear a Fax tone, press
to start transmission.
You can put down the handset.
Memo
When putting down the handset, after the transmission is
complete, the display screen of the machine returns to the
screen displayed before the manual transmission.
If you keep picking the handset, you can talk to your
destination.
Transmission to Multiple
Destinations (Broadcast)
This function allows you to transmit faxes to
multiple destinations at the same time. You can
specify up to 100 destinations using the ten-key
pad, speed dial, and group lists of destinations.
1 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key.
3 Check that [Fax] is selected and press
to open the fax start screen.
4 Check that [Add Destination] is
selected and then press .
5 Specify a destination.
6 Repeat steps 4 to 5 to enter all the
destinations.
7 When you have specified all the
destinations, press .
8 [Please press Start key to begin
transmission. To delete, select
checkbox and choose Operate.]
appears.
9 If specified all the destination appears,
press .
OK
OK
OK
MONO
OK
OK
MONO
MONO
Various Functions for Transmission
-20-
Memo
Press the <RESET/LOG OUT> key to cancel the
operation.
Reference
When [Broadcast Destination] is enabled, the
destination numbers are displayed before transmission.
For details, refer to "Checking Broadcast Destination" P. 25.
For details on how to cancel transmission, refer to the
User's Manual Basic.
Using From the Group List
The group list is useful for broadcast
transmission. Register destination group lists in
advance.
Reference
For details on transmission using the group list, refer to
the User's Manual Basic.
Transmission at a Specified
Time (Set Tx time)
This function allows you to instruct the machine
to transmit faxes at a specified time. When you
set a fax job to be sent later, the fax data is
stored in memory and automatically sent at the
specified time.
Up to 20 jobs can be scheduled up to one month
in advance.
1 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key.
3 Check that [Fax] is selected and press
to open the fax start screen.
4 Press the to select [Fax Functions]
and then press .
5 Press the to select [Delayed Tx] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
7 Press the or to select the desired
date and time and then press .
- To move to the next box, press the .
- Dates are displayed as [Date/Month].
8 Press the until the start screen
appears.
9 Press the to select [
Add Destination
]
and then press .
10 Specify a destination.
11 Press .
Memo
When you want to change the specified time of a
reservation, cancel the reservation and make another one.
You can make reservations for other fax jobs while the
machine is transmitting.
Reference
For details on how to cancel a fax job, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
Various Functions for Transmission
-21-
Faxing
2
Fcode Transmission
Fcode transmission uses sub addresses for
communication in accordance with the standard
of ITU-T. By creating and registering Fcode
boxes,
you can perform confidential communication
and
bulletin board communication.
You can register up to 20 Fcode boxes.
When registering an Fcode box, be sure to
register a sub address, that is used to identify
the Fcode box.
Fcode Confidential Communication
When an Fcode confidential box is set in the
recipient fax machine, you can perform confidential
communication by specifying the sub address of
the box.
Received data cannot be printed unless the
specified ID code is entered. Therefore, this
function is useful when transmitting data that
needs security protection.
Reference
To transmit faxes using Fcode confidential communication,
refer to "Transmission Using a Sub Address (Fcode
Transmission)" P. 22.
To print the received faxes using Fcode confidential
communication, refer to "Printing Stored Documents" P. 23.
Fcode Bulletin Board Communication
When an Fcode bulletin box is set in the recipient
machine, you can transmit to and remove data
from a bulletin box by specifying its sub address.
Reference
To receive data stored in the bulletin box of the recipient
machine, refer to "Reception Using a Sub Address (Fcode
Polling)" P. 22.
To store data in a bulletin box of your machine, refer to
"Storing Documents in a Bulletin Box" P. 23.
Registering Fcode Boxes
To perform Fcode communication, register an
Fcode box. Be sure to register a sub address and
an PIN number on each Fcode box. (Only Fcode
confidential communication)
Memo
Maximum number of characters is as follows:
- Box Name: A maximum of 16 characters.
- Sub-Address: A maximum of 20 digits including # and *.
- PIN number: 4 digits.
Reference
For details on how to enter text, refer to the User's Manual
Basic.
For Fcode Confidential Communication
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Fcode Box] and
then press .
7 Press the to select a box number and
then press .
8 Check that [Register] is selected and
then press .
To edit the registered Fcode Confidential Box,
enter the PIN number and select [Edit].
9 Check that [Confidential Box] is
selected and then press .
10 Check that [Box Name] is selected and
then press .
11 Enter a box name.
12 Select [Enter] and then press .
13 Press the to select [Sub-Address]
and then press the .
14 Enter a sub address.
15 Select [Enter] and then press .
16 Press the to select [I.D. code] and
then press the .
17 Enter a PIN number and then press .
Note
The entered PIN number is not displayed. Be sure to
write it down and keep it safe.
18 If necessary, specify [Hold time] to set
a period to retain data.
a) Press the to select [Hold time] and
then press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Various Functions for Transmission
-22-
b) Enter a value between 0 and 31 (days),
and then press
.
Memo
When [00] (day) is set, data is retained for an
indefinite period.
19 Press .
For Fcode Bulletin Board Commu-
nication
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Fcode Box] and
then press .
7 Press the to select a box number and
then press .
8 Check that [Register] is selected and
then press .
To edit the registered Fcode Confidential Box,
select [Edit].
9 Press the to select [Bulletin Box] and
then press .
10 Check that [Box Name] is selected and
then press the .
11 Enter a box name.
12 Select [Enter] and then press .
13 Press the to select [Sub-Address]
and then press .
14 Enter a sub address.
15 Select [Enter] and then press .
16 Press .
Transmission Using a Sub Address
(Fcode Transmission)
By entering a sub address, Fcode confidential
transmission and Fcode bulletin board
transmission can be done.
Memo
Be sure to check a destination sub address.
1 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key.
3 Check that [Fax] is selected and press
to open the fax start screen.
4 Press the to select [Fax Functions]
and then press .
5 Press the select [Fcode Tx] and then
press .
6 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
7 Enter the sub address of the box
registered in the recipient machine.
8 Select [Enter] and then press .
9 Press the until the start screen
appears.
10 Press the to select [Add Destination]
and then press .
11 Specify a destination.
12 Press .
Reception Using a Sub Address
(Fcode Polling)
You can perform Fcode polling by entering the
sub address of a sender machine's bulletin box.
This function makes a remote fax machine
transmit a fax in response to instructions from
your machine.
Note
You cannot receive data if the sender has a password on
the bulletin box.
1 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
Various Functions for Transmission
-23-
Faxing
2
2 Check that [Fax] is selected and press
to open the fax standby screen.
3 Press the to select [Fax Functions]
and then press .
4 Press the to select [Fcode Polling]
and then press .
5 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
6 Enter the sub address of the bulletin box
registered in the sender machine.
7 Select [Enter] and then press .
8 Press the until the start screen appears.
9 Press the to select [Add Destination]
and then press .
10 Specify a destination.
11 Press .
Memo
Received data is automatically printed.
Storing Documents in a Bulletin Box
You can store only one document in a bulletin
box of your machine.
Reference
You must register a bulletin box in advance. For details on
how to register a bulletin box, refer to "Registering Fcode
Boxes" P. 21.
1 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2 Press the <SETTING> key.
3 Press the to select [Store Document
Settings] and then press .
4 Check that [Store] is selected and then
press .
5 Check that [Fcode Bulletin board] is
selected and then press .
6 Press the to select a box number and
then press .
7 Check that [Over Write] is selected and
then press .
[Over Write] replaces documents in the box.
8 Press the or to select [Yes] and
then press .
Memo
The data stored in an Fcode bulletin box is not deleted
when the recipient gets it.
Printing Stored Documents
You can print confidential received documents.
When a document is received at an Fcode box,
an Fcode reception notice is printed. Check the
Fcode box number and print the stored
document.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Store Document
Settings] and then press .
3 Press the to select [Print] and then
press .
4 Check that [Fcode Box] is selected and
then press .
5 Press the to select the desired box
number and then press .
6 If necessary, enter the PIN number and
then press .
7 Press the to select the file number you
want to print and then press .
8 Press the or to select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen and then press .
Memo
Confidential received documents are automatically deleted
after printing.
Deleting Stored Bulletin Documents
You can delete documents stored in a bulletin
box.
Memo
The data stored in an Fcode confidential box is
automatically deleted when you print the data.
The data stored in an Fcode bulletin box is not deleted
when the recipient gets it.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Various Functions for Transmission
-24-
2 Press the to select [Store Document
Settings] and then press .
3 Press the to select [Delete] and then
press .
4 Check that [Fcode Bulletin board] is
selected and then press .
5 Press the to select the box number of
a document you want to delete and then
press two times.
6 Press the or to select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen and then press .
Deleting Fcode Boxes
You can delete an unnecessary Fcode
Confidential box and Fcode bulletin box.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Fcode Box] and
then press .
7 Press the to select the box number
you want to delete and then press .
8
Enter the PIN number if necessary and then
press
.
To delete Fcode bulletin box, PIN number is not
necessary.
9 Press the to select [Delete] and then
press .
10 Press the or to select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen and then press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Security Functions
-25-
Faxing
2
Security Functions
This section explains the security functions at fax transmission.
Memo
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Reference
For details on how to specify a destination, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Security Functions at
Transmission
The machine has the following three security
functions:
ID check transmission
Checking broadcast destination
Pressing dial twice
These functions prevent you from transmitting
faxes to the wrong destination.
ID Check Transmission
This function checks and matches the last four
digits of the destination numbers with those
registered in the destination machine. If this
function is enabled, the machine will transmit
faxes only when they match.
Memo
If the destination machine has no registered fax number,
the machine does not transmit the fax.
ID check transmission is unavailable when you transmit
faxes manually.
Configuration
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Security
Function] and then press .
7 Check that [ID Check Tx] is selected
and then press .
8 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
Operation
1 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key.
3 Check that [Fax] is selected and press
to open the fax start screen.
4 Check that [Add Destination] is
selected and then press .
5 Specify a destination.
6 Press .
Checking Broadcast Destination
When this function is enabled, a fax number
confirmation screen is displayed before
transmission starts. By factory default, this
function is enabled.
Memo
Broadcast destination check function is available only
when multiple destinations are specified.
When [Confirm Dial] is also enabled, it is done first.
Broadcast destination check function is unavailable by
manual transmission.
Configuration
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Security
Function] and then press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
OK
OK
OK
OK
Security Functions
-26-
7 Press the to select [Broadcast
Destination] and then press .
8 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
Operation
1 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key.
3 Check that [Fax] is selected and press
to open the fax start screen.
4 Check that [Add Destination] is
selected and then press .
5 Specify all the destinations.
6 Press .
A fax number confirmation screen is displayed.
7 [Please press Start key to begin
transmission. To delete, select
checkbox and choose Operate.]
appears.
8 If specified all the destination appears,
press .
If necessary, press to select the destination
you want to delete and then press the . Select
[Delete The Address] and then press .
9 Press to start transmission.
Memo
If the destination number entered with the ten-key pad is
wrong, delete it and re-specify the correct one.
When many destinations are specified, you may not be
able to check all of them at one time. To check all the
destinations, press the to scroll the screen.
Pressing Dial Twice (Confirm Dial)
This function requires you to re-enter the
destination number when you enter a destination
using the ten-key pad. The fax is sent only if the
two numbers match.
Memo
The confirm dial function is unavailable when you specify
the destination using speed dial.
If you use symbols in the destination number, re-enter the
symbols also.
The confirm dial function is done first when [Check
broadcast dest.] is also enabled.
You cannot use the dial double-press function with manual
sending.
Configuration
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Security
Function] and then press .
7 Press the to select [Confirm Dial]
and then press .
8 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
Operation
1
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key.
3 Enter a destination number using the
ten-key pad.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
A screen that requires you to re-enter the
destination number appears.
5 Enter the destination number again using
the ten-key pad.
6 Select [Enter] and then press .
The fax start screen appears.
7 Press to start transmission.
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
Various Settings for Fax Reception
-27-
Faxing
2
Various Settings for Fax Reception
This section explains various settings for fax reception.
Memo
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
When Received Image is
Larger Than Paper Size
Parts of images that do not fit in the printable
area of the specified paper may be reduced,
discarded, or printed on the next sheet of paper.
For example, if a fax that is longer than A4 size is
received while the specified paper is A4 size, the
bottom of the image is printed on a subsequent
piece of paper.
You can avoid this situation by specifying a
reduction rate and margin.
Specifying a Reduction Rate
The reduction rate determines whether or not the
machine automatically reduces the received
image to the specified paper size. [Auto] reduces
the image automatically and [100%] prints the
image without reduction. By factory default, [Rx
Reduc. Rate] is set to [Auto].
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Other Settings]
and then press .
7 Press the to select [Rx Reduc. Rate]
and then press .
8 Press the to select [Auto] or [100%]
and then press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
Specifying a Reduction Margin
The reduction margin is the threshold level which
determines when to print part of the received
image on the next page.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Other Settings]
and then press .
7 Press the to select [Reduc. Margin]
and then press .
8 Enter a value between 0 and 100 (mm)
and then press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
Memo
When the excess part is larger than the specified reduction
margin, the excess part is printed on the next page.
When the excess part is smaller than the specified
reduction margin, the received image is reduced onto a
single page.
When you set [Rx Reduc. Rate] to [100%] and the excess
part is smaller than the specified reduction margin, the
excess part is discarded.
Changing Soft Ringer Volume
You can change the soft ringer volume, which
sounds when there is an incoming fax or call.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Various Settings for Fax Reception
-28-
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Fax Setting] and
then press .
7 Press the to select [Soft Ringer
Volume] and then press .
8 Press the to select a volume and then
press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
Memo
The soft ringer volume setting is available only when
[Reception Mode] is set to [Tel/Fax Ready Mode].
Forwarding Received Faxes As
Fax Documents
You can set the machine to forward the received
faxes automatically to a specified destination as fax
documents if [Forwarding Setting] is enabled.
Memo
When [Forwarding Setting] is enabled, received faxes are
not printed by the machine.
The forwarding function is disabled when [Reception Mode]
is set to [Tel Ready Mode].
Registering a Forwarding Destination
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Fax Setting] and
then press .
7 Press the to select [Forwarding
Setting] and then press .
8 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
9 Enter a forwarding number.
10 Select [Enter] and then press .
11 Press the until the top screen appears.
Setting waiting time for a
response
With this function, you can set a waiting time to
respond to an incoming call and start receiving a
fax in the machine.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Other Settings]
and then press .
7 Press the to select [Ring response]
and then press .
8 Press the to select a time and then
press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Faxing From a Computer
-29-
Faxing
2
Faxing From a Computer
This section explains how to send a fax from a computer and how to edit data of the phone book. The
fax driver allows you to send faxes directly from your computer to a destination via the machine without
printing the document.
This function is available only on the following Windows operating systems:
Windows 8/Windows Server 2012/Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008/
Windows XP/Windows Server 2003
Be sure to install the fax driver for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP,
MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb, before performing the following procedures.
Reference
For details on how to install the fax driver, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Memo
The following procedures uses MB491, NotePad as an example. The procedures and menus may differ depending on the OS and
application you use.
Sending a Fax From a
Computer
1 Open the file you want to fax.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 From [Select Printer], select [OKI
MB491 (FAX)] and then click [Print].
4 On the [Specifying numbers] tab of
the [Select Recipients] dialog box,
enter the destination name in [Name].
5 Enter the destination fax number in [FAX
number].
6 Click [Add<-].
7 If necessary, add a destination from the
phone book.
a) Select the [Phone book] tab.
b) Select a destination and then click [Add<-].
8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 to specify all the
destinations.
9 Click [OK] to start transmitting.
Adding a Fax Number to the
Phone Book
Note
You cannot register two identical names. The same fax
numbers can be registered if the names are different.
Memo
You can register up to 1000 destinations.
1 Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers]
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MB491 (FAX)].
3 On the [Setup] tab, click [Phone book].
4 From the [FAX number] menu, select
[New (FAX number)].
5 On the [New (FAX number)] dialog
box, enter a destination name in [Name].
6 Enter a destination fax number in [FAX
number].
7
Enter comments in [
Comments
] if necessary.
8 Click [OK].
9 From the [FAX number] menu, select
[Save].
10 Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
11 From the [FAX number] menu, select
[Exit].
Memo
The name and fax number entered in this procedure are
printed on the cover sheet.
Faxing From a Computer
-30-
Grouping Entries
By grouping the registered destinations, you can
send faxes to multiple destinations at the same
time.
1 Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MB491 (FAX)].
3 On the [Setup] tab, click [Phone book].
4 From the [FAX number] menu, select
[New (Group)].
5 On the [New (Group)] dialog box, enter
[Group name].
6 Enter comments in [Comments] if
necessary.
7 Select an entry to register in a group and
then click [Add->].
8 If necessary, register a fax number
directly.
a) Click [New (FAX number)].
b) Perform steps 5 to 8 in "Adding a Fax
Number to the Phone Book" P. 29.
c) Select an entry and then click [Add->].
9 Click [OK] to save.
On the left column of the [Phone book] dialog box,
a new group is added. When you select a group,
the fax numbers registered in the group are
shown on the right column of the dialog box.
10 Select [Save] from the [FAX Number]
menu.
11 Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
12 Select [Exit] from the [FAX Number]
menu.
Sending a Fax to a Group
By using a group, you can specify multiple
destinations in one operation.
1 Open the file you want to fax.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 From [Select Printer], select [OKI
MB491 (FAX)] and then click [Print].
4 On the [Select Recipients] dialog box,
select the [Phone book] tab.
5 Select a group from the right column and
then click [Add<-].
6 Click [OK] to start transmission.
Attaching a Cover Sheet
1 Open the file you want to fax.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 From [Select Printer], select [OKI
MB491 (FAX)].
4 Click [Preferences].
5 Select the [Cover Sheet] tab.
6 Select the [Print all recipients'
information on each cover sheet] or
[Print only one recipient's
information on each cover sheet].
7 From the format list, select the desired
format.
- You can view an enlarged image of each format
by clicking [Zoom].
- Selecting the [Add the recipient's FAX
number] check box prints the recipient fax
number on the cover sheet.
- Selecting the [Add the recipient's comments]
check box prints comments registered in the
phone book on the cover sheet.
- You can add a custom cover sheet design by
clicking [Custom cover sheet].
8 If necessary, enter the sender name, fax
number, and comment on the [Sender]
tab to be printed on the cover sheet.
9 Click [OK].
10 Perform steps 3 to 9 in "Sending a Fax
From a Computer" P. 29.
Note
When selecting [Print all recipients' information on
each cover sheet] and transmitting to multiple
destinations (broadcasting), all destinations' names,
destinations' fax numbers (only when they are set), and
comments in the phone book (only when they are set) are
described on the same cover sheet and transmitted to all
destinations. Caution is required when broadcasting to
multiple outside destinations.
Faxing From a Computer
-31-
Faxing
2
Canceling a Fax Job From a
Computer
You can cancel a job while the data is being
transmitted to the machine.
1 Double-click the printer icon in the
toolbar.
2 Select the job to cancel in the print
queue.
3 From the [Document] menu, select
[Cancel].
Reference
Once the data is stored in the machine, you cannot cancel
the job from your computer. For details on how to cancel a
fax job stored in the machine memory, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
Exporting and Importing
Phone Book Data
The export and import functions allow you to
manage the fax numbers in a phone book
created on another computer. The following
procedure explains how to export the phone
book data from your computer and to import it to
another computer.
Note
You cannot export groups. However, each entry in a group
is exported.
Entries that are already registered are not imported.
1 Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MB491 (FAX)].
3 On the [Setup] tab, click [Phone book].
4 From the [Tools] menu, select [Export].
5 On the [Export to file] dialog box,
specify where to save the file.
6 Enter a name for the file in [File name]
and then click [Save].
The data of the phone book is exported as a CSV
file in which entries are put in display order, being
separated with a comma. The name comes first,
followed by the fax number and comment.
7 Close the phone book.
8 Copy the created file to another
computer.
9 Repeat steps 1 to 3 on the computer to
launch the phone book.
10 From the [Tools] menu, select [Import].
11 On the [Import Phone Book] dialog
box, specify the file you have copied.
12 Click [Next].
13 Select [Save] from the [FAX Number]
menu.
14 Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
15 Select [Exit] from the [FAX Number]
menu.
Associating New Definition With
Phone Book Format
If you want to import a CSV file with the format
different from that of the phone book, select a
CSV definition file and associate the definition
with that of the phone book.
1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in "Exporting and
Importing Phone Book Data" on the
computer to launch the phone book.
2 From the [Tools] menu, select [Import].
3 On the [Import Phone Book] dialog
box, specify the CSV file to import in
[Choose a CSV File].
4 Select the [Setup relationship
between the fields imported and
phone book.] check box and specify a
CSV definition file if necessary.
Select [Comma (,)] from [Field Delimiter].
Memo
The operation can be continued if a definition file is not
specified. If the definition file is not specified, select
whether to save a new definition file on the dialog box
displayed in step 6.
5 Click [Next].
6 Associate the definition you are
importing with that of the phone book
and then click [OK].
7
Select [Save] from the [FAX Number]
menu.
8 Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
9 Select [Exit] from the [FAX Number]
menu.
Scan To FaxServer
-32-
Scan To FaxServer
This section explains how to customize an e-mail when it is sent from this machine to the fax server. You
can select a format of e-mail address to be set in the TO field. Also, you can add an e-mail text or not.
Enabling the Scan To FaxServer
function
To enable the Scan To FaxServer function, select
the followings from the Administrator Menu:
[Admin Setup]>[FaxServer Function]>
[Environmental Setting]. Turn the [FaxServer
Function] ON and restart the MFP.
Note
If this operation is made, the fax function is disabled.
Customizing the destination
e-mail address
The Prefix and Suffix settings are used in the
following format. The "Fax number" of this
format means a number selected in the "Add
Destination" field.
"Prefix + Fax number + Suffix"
For example, if you set "FAX=" as the Prefix and
set "@faxserver" as the Suffix, the mail
destination (To:) is set as "FAX=012-345-
6789@faxserver" when you execute Scan To
FaxServer.
Note
Set the Prefix and Suffix based on the mail reception
specifications of your FaxServer. The Virtual Domain and
others may be required to be set on the mail server due to
the certain FaxServer operating environment.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup],
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Press the to select [FaxServer
Function], and then press .
5 Press the to select [Environmental
Setting], and then press .
6 Enter a character string in the "Prefix"
column.
7 Enter a character string in the "Suffix"
column.
8 Press the until the top screen is
displayed.
Customizing the e-mail text
If [Text] is turned ON, the text is added to the
mail. If your FaxServer supports the transmission
of mail text, the text is included in the fax
transmission data.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup],
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Press the to select [FaxServer
Function], and then press .
5 Press the to select [Environmental
Setting], and then press .
6 If the "Text" is set to ON, the text is
added. If it is set to OFF, the text is not
added.
7 Press the until the top screen is
displayed.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
-33-
Scanning
3
3. Scanning
This chapter explains your machine's useful Scan functions.
Advanced Operations for Scanning to E-mail
This section explains useful operations for scanning to e-mail. This function also applies to both the Scan
To Internet Fax and the Scan To FaxServer.
Memo
The following procedures are explained under the assumption that [Continuous Scan] is disabled. For the basic procedures
when [Continuous Scan] is enabled, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Setting Sender and Reply to
Addresses (From/Reply to)
You can set the e-mail address from which e-
mails are sent and the address to which
responses are sent.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select the [Admin
Setup] and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press .
6 Press the to select [E-mail Setup]
and then press .
7 Press the to select [From/Reply to]
and then press .
8 Press the to select [From] or [Reply
to] and then press .
9 Enter e-mail addresses.
When [Reply to] is selected in step 8, select a
method to enter a destination and specify a
destination. Proceed to step 11.
10 Select [Enter] and then press .
11 Press the until the top screen appears.
Memo
Select an e-mail address from the address book.
Creating Templates
You can record up to five templates with various
subject lines and body text.
Registering a Subject
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select the [Admin
Setup] and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press .
6 Press the to select [E-mail Setup]
and then press .
7 Press the to select [Template] and
then press .
8 Check that [Edit Subject] is selected
and then press .
9 Press the to select a number and then
press .
10 Enter the subject up to 80 characters.
11 Select [Enter] and then press .
12 Press the until the top screen appears.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Advanced Operations for Scanning to E-mail
-34-
Registering Body Text
1 Perform steps 1 to 7 in "Registering a
Subject" P. 33.
2 Press the to select [Edit Body] and
then press .
3 Press the to select a number and then
press .
4 Enter the body text up to 256 characters.
5 Select [Enter] and then press .
6 Press the until the top screen appears.
Using a Template
You can use the templates recorded in "Creating
Temp la tes" P. 33 or standardized e-mails.
1 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2 Press the <SCAN> key.
To use the Internet Fax or FaxServer, press the
<FAX/HOOK> key.
3 Check that [E-mail] is selected and then
press .
If you have pressed the <FAX/HOOK> key in
Step 2, select [Fax] or [Internet Fax].
4 Press the to select [Scan setting]
and then press .
5
Press the to select [
Edit E-mail
]
and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Subject] or
[Email body] and then press .
7
Check that [
Select Subject
] or [
Select
Text] is selected and then press .
If FaxServer is enabled and [Text] is ON and if
you have selected the [FAX] in Step 2, the "Select
Text" is not displ ayed.
8 Press the to select a subject or text
and then press .
9 Press the to select [Add Destination]
and then press .
10 Press the to select an entry method
and then press .
11 Specify a destination and then press .
12 Press or .
If you have pressed the <FAX/HOOK> in Step 2,
only MONO is enabled.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
C
OLOR
Advanced Operations for Scanning, Internet Faxing and Scanning to Fax Server
-35-
Scanning
3
Advanced Operations for Scanning, Internet
Faxing and Scanning to Fax Server
This section explains useful operations for scanning, Internet faxing and Scanning to Fax Server. You can
configure the scan, Internet fax and scan to fax server functions to alter the output to suit your needs.
The scan to local PC and the scan to remote PC cannot be used for the following functions.
In this section, the procedures are explained from scan menu as an example. If you use the Internet fax
function, each setting can be configured from the [Scan Setting] menu on the [Internet FAX
Standby] or [Scan to Fax Server Standby] screen.
Memo
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Reference
For details on how to start a scan job, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Specifying the File Name
You can specify the file name of scanned
documents.
1 On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press .
If you select [USB Memory], go to step 3.
2 Press the to select [Scan Setting]
and then press .
3 Press the to select [File Name] and
then press .
4 Enter a file name up to 64 characters.
5 Select [Enter] and then press .
Memo
If you do not specify the file name, the name specified by
the factory default settings is used.
Changing the Scan Size (Scan
Size)
You can specify the appropriate scan size for your
document.
1 On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press .
If you select [USB Memory], go to step 3.
2 Check that [Scan Setting] is selected
and then press .
3 Check that [Scan Size] is selected and
then press .
4 Press the to select a value and then
press .
Changing the Resolution
(Document Type)
You can change to the appropriate resolution to
scan your document to get optimum image
quality.
1 On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press .
If you select [USB Memory], go to step 3.
2 Press the to select [Scan Setting]
and then press .
3 Press the to select [Image Settings]
and then press .
For the Internet fax, select [Resolution] and
proceed to step 5 after pressing .
4 Press the to select [Document Type]
and then press .
5 Press the to select a type and then
press .
Memo
Scanning takes longer in [Photo] mode.
Adjusting the Density
(Density)
You can adjust the density to seven levels.
1 On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press .
If you select [USB Memory], go to step 3.
2 Press the to select [Scan Setting]
and then press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Advanced Operations for Scanning, Internet Faxing and Scanning to Fax Server
-36-
3 Press the to select [Image Settings]
and then press .
For the Internet fax, select [Density] and proceed
to step 5 after pressing .
4 Check that [Density] is selected and
then press
.
5 Press the or to select a density
value and then press .
Memo
[0] is the standard value. To darken the document image,
select [+1], [+2] or [+3] (most dense). Conversely, to
lighten the document image, select [-1], [-2] or [-3]
(least dense).
Specifying the File Format
You can specify the file format of scanned
documents. You can select a file format from
PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS.
Note
This function is only for scanning. Internet FAX and Scan
to Fax Server cannot be used.
1 On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press .
If you select [USB Memory], go to step 3.
2 Press the to select [Scan Setting]
and then press .
3 Press the to select [File Format] and
then press .
4 Press the to select the type of color
from [Color], [Mono (Grayscale)], or
[Mono (Binary)] and then press .
5 Press the to select a file format and
then press .
Memo
If you selected [Mono (Binary)] in step 4, [JPEG]
cannot be selected.
Encrypting PDF
You can encrypt a scanned document. You can
set the encryption level, a password for opening
documents, an authentication password, and
permission for created PDF files with this
function.
A password for opening a document is password
to open an encrypted PDF. It cannot be the same
with the authentication password. The password
should be up to 32 1-byte characters.
Authentication password is a password to control
operations including printing, extracting and
editing encrypted PDF. It cannot be the same
with the password to open a document. The
password should be up to 32 1-byte characters.
Note
This function is only for scanning. You cannot use this
function for Internet faxing and scanning to Fax Server.
[Encrypted PDF] is displayed only when [PDF] is set to
any of [Color], [Mono (Grayscale)] and [Mono
(Binary)] of [File Format].
To encrypt PDF, it is necessary to set a password to open a
document or authentication password.
Setting a password for opening a
document and authentication
password
Memo
This section uses both a password to open a document and
authentication password for setting as an example.
1 On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press .
2 Press the to select [Scan Setting]
and then press .
3 Press the to select [Encrypted PDF]
and then press .
4 Press the to select [Encrypt] from
[Not encrypt] and [Encrypt] and then
press .
5 Press the to Select the encryption
level from [Low], [Medium] and [High]
and then press .
6 Press the to select [Enable] from
[Disable], [Enable] and [Apply
Default Password] and then press .
Set a password for opening the document.
7 Press the to enter the password.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Advanced Operations for Scanning, Internet Faxing and Scanning to Fax Server
-37-
Scanning
3
8 Select [Enter] and then press .
9 Re-enter the password.
10 Select [Enter] and then press .
11 Press the to select [Enable] from
[Disable], [Enable] and [Apply
Default Password] and then press .
Set the authentication password.
12 Press the and then enter the password.
13 Select [Enter] and then press .
14 Re-enter the password.
15 Select [Enter] and then press .
16 Select the permission to print the
document and then press .
- When the encryption level is set to [Low] in step
5, you can select [Not Allowed] or [High
resolution].
- When the encryption level is set to [Middle] or
[High] in step 5, you can select [
Not Allowed
]
[low resolution (150dpi)] or [High resolution].
17 Select the permission to copy the text
and object and then press .
18 Select the permission to change the PDF
file and then press .
- When the encryption level is set to [Low] in step
5, you can select [Not Allowed], [Allow To
Make A Comment], [Allow To Swap Page], or
[Allow all op. except pg extract.]
- When the encryption level is set to [Medium] or
[
High
] in step 5, you can select [
Not Allowed
],
[Allow To Make A Comment], [Allow Ins., Del.
or Rotate Page.], or [Allow all op. except pg
extract.]
19 Check the security settings and then
press .
Note
The settings of each authentication in steps 16 to 18 are
displayed only when [Permissions Password] is set for
[Enable] or [Apply Default Password]
Use the default password
When [Use the default password] is selected
in step 6 or 11 in "Setting a password for
opening a document and authentication
password" P. 36, you can use the default
password registered in advance.
Use the procedures below to register the initial
password.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select the [Admin
Setup] and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press .
6 Press the to select [Default
Settings] and then press .
7 Press the to select [Encrypted PDF
Setting] and then press .
8 Press the to select [Document Open
Password]/[Permissions Password]
and then press .
9 Enter a password up to 32 characters.
10 Select [Enter] and then press .
11 Press the until the top screen is
displayed.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Advanced Operations for Scanning, Internet Faxing and Scanning to Fax Server
-38-
Setting the Compression Level
You can specify the appropriate compression
level.
1 On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press .
If you select [USB Memory], go to step 3.
2 Press the to select [Scan Setting]
and then press .
3 Press the to select the [Compression
Rate] and then press .
If you use the Internet fax function, go to step 5.
4 Press the to select the color type
(Color, Mono etc.) and then press .
5 Press the to select the compression
level from [High], [Medium] or [Low]
and then press .
Memo
If you select [Mono (Binary)], you can select a
compression level from [High], [Medium] or [Raw].
Setting the Grayscale
When Grayscale is enabled, data scanned by
is not black-and-white (binary) but
grayscale (255 tones).
Note
This function is only for scanning. Internet FAX and Scan
to Fax Server cannot be used.
1 On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press .
If you select [USB Memory], go to step 3.
2 Press the to select [Scan Setting]
and then press .
3 Press the to select the [Grayscale]
and then press .
4 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
OK
OK
OK
OK
Using Drivers and Software
-39-
Scanning
3
Using Drivers and Software
This section explains how to use the scanner driver and utilities. They allow you to scan documents and
change settings easily on your computer.
Using TWAIN Driver
Memo
The explanations in this section use PaperPort in Windows
and Adobe Photoshop CS3 in Mac OS X as an example.
In this section, procedures using Scan To Remote PC with
USB connection are described. For how to connect to the
network and start to scan by Scan To Local PC, refer to the
User's Manual Basic.
Note
The Twain driver for Mac OS X supports the Mac OS X 10.4
to 10.7.
To use this function, applications supporting TWAIN
(PaperPort or Adobe Photoshop CS3, etc.) should be
installed in your computer.
Reference
For details on how to start a scan job, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
For details on how to install PaperPort, refer to "Installing
Utilities" P. 106.
Starting a Scan Job (for Windows)
1
Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
When the device's Scan Mode settings are in
"Simple Mode", please proceed to Step 4.
Otherwise, please carry out step 2 and 3.
2 Press the <SCAN> key.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
4 Start PaperPort on your computer.
5 Click [Select] and then select the
scanner driver of the machine.
A window appears.
6 Click the [Scan].
7 Click the scan buttons.
The scan job starts.
8 Click [Quit].
9 When there is no continued page or the
back side is not scanned, click [Quit].
Memo
The following five buttons are registered as default settings.
Scan Photograph
Scan Magazine
Scan for OCR
Scan for Internet
Customize
Changing Settings
You can adjust how the document is scanned by
changing the driver setting.
The following explains the setting items.
Simple Mode
You can change the settings of five registered
buttons.
1 Follow the procedure for "Starting a Scan
Job (for Windows)" through step 6.
2 Select [Simple] from [Mode].
3 Click [Settings].
A window appears.
4 Click the scan button to change the
settings.
5 Click [OK].
6 If you start a scan job, click the scan
button.
If you want to finish the setting, click [Quit].
OK
Using Drivers and Software
-40-
Advanced Mode
You can adjust in detail how a document is scanned.
1 Follow the procedure for "Starting a Scan
Job (for Windows)" P. 39 through step 6.
2 Select [Advanced] from [Mode].
3 Change the settings if necessary.
4 Click [Scan] to start scanning.
If you want to finish the setting, click [Quit].
Reference
For details on how to change each setting, refer to the
online help.
Starting a Scan Job (for Mac OS X)
(MB441, MB451, MB451w, MB461,
MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
ES4161 MFP, ES4191 MFP,
MPS4200mb)
1
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
When the device's Scan Mode settings are in
"Simple Mode", please proceed to Step 4.
Otherwise, please carry out step 2 and 3.
2 Press the <SCAN> key.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
4 Start Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
5
Select [
Import
] from [
File
] and then select
[
OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x USB
] or
[
OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x Network
].
- When [OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x USB] is
selected, proceed to step 9.
- When [OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x Network] is
selected, the network scan is the second or later
time, proceed to step 9.
6 For the first network scan, the dialog box
indicating that the tool for selecting a
connection destination is started is
displayed. Then, click [OK].
7 On the dialog box of [Scan Settings],
select a connection destination to
register host information if necessary,
and then click [OK].
8 Select [Import] from [File] of Adobe
Photoshop CS3 and select [OKI
MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x Network].
The windows appears.
9 Click the scan button.
Scanning starts.
10 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
[Photoshop].
Starting a Scan Job (for Mac OS X)
(MB461+LP, MB491+LP,
MPS4700mb)
1 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
When the device's Scan Mode settings are in
"Simple Mode", please proceed to Step 4.
Otherwise, please carry out step 2 and 3.
2 Press the <SCAN> key.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
4 Start Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
5 Select [Import] from [File] and then
select [OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x USB]
or [OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x
Network].
- When [OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x USB] is
selected, proceed to step 9.
- When [OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x Network] is
selected, the network scan is the second or later
time, proceed to step 9.
6 For the first network scan, the dialog box
indicating that the tool for selecting a
connection destination is started is
displayed. Then, click [OK].
7 On the dialog box of [Scan Settings],
select a connection destination to
register host information if necessary,
and then click [OK].
8 Select [Import] from [File] of Adobe
Photoshop CS3 and select [OKI
MB4x1+LP_MPS47x Network].
The windows appears.
9 Click the scan button.
Scanning starts.
OK
OK
Using Drivers and Software
-41-
Scanning
3
10 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
[Photoshop].
Changing Settings (for Macintosh)
You can adjust how the document is scanned by
changing the driver setting.
The following explains the setting items.
Simple Mode
You can change the settings of five registered
buttons.
1 Follow the procedure for "Starting a Scan
Job (for Mac OS X) (MB441, MB451,
MB451w, MB461, MB471, MB471w,
MB491, MB491+, ES4161 MFP, ES4191
MFP, MPS4200mb)" or "Starting a Scan
Job (for Mac OS X) (MB461+LP,
MB491+LP, MPS4700mb)" through step
8.
2 Select [Simple] from [Mode].
3 Click [Settings].
A window appears.
4 Click the scan button to change the
settings.
5 Click [OK].
6 If you start a scan job, click the scan
button.
If you want to finish the setting, click [Quit].
Advanced Mode
You can adjust in detail how a document is
scanned.
1 Follow the procedure for "Starting a Scan
Job (for Mac OS X) (MB441, MB451,
MB451w, MB461, MB471, MB471w,
MB491, MB491+, ES4161 MFP, ES4191
MFP, MPS4200mb)" or "Starting a Scan
Job (for Mac OS X) (MB461+LP,
MB491+LP, MPS4700mb)" P. 4 0 through
step 8.
2 Select [Advanced] from [Mode].
3 Change the settings if necessary.
4 Click [Scan] to start scanning.
If you want to finish the setting, click [Quit].
Using WIA Driver
The WIA driver does not support the network
scan function. Connect the machine with the
computer via USB or WSD Scan.
The WIA driver does not support Mac OS X.
The WIA 2.0 driver supports Windows 8/
Windows Server 2012/ Windows 7/ Windows
Server 2008 R2.
The WIA 1.0 driver supports Windows Vista/
Windows Server 2008/ Windows XP/ Windows
Server 2003.
Starting a Scan Job
Memo
The explanations in this section use PaperPort as an
example, and may differ from the description depending
on your application.
1 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
When the device's Scan Mode settings are in
"Simple Mode", please proceed to Step 4.
Otherwise, please carry out step 2 and 3.
2 Press the <SCAN> key.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
4 Start PaperPort on your computer.
5 Click [Select] and then click
[WIA: MB4x1/ES41x1/MPS42x] (for
MB441, MB451, MB451w, MB461,
MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
ES4161 MFP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb)
or [WIA: MB4x1+LP/MPS47x] (for
MB461+LP, MB491+LP, MPS4700mb).
6 Click [Scan].
7 Select a paper feeding method.
8 Select a document type.
9 Specify the area to be scanned.
10 Click [Scan].
11 Click [Cancel] when scanning is finished.
12 When there is no continued page or the
back side is not scanned, click [Finish].
The scanned image is displayed in PaperPort.
OK
Using Drivers and Software
-42-
Using Windows FAX and Scan
"Windows FAX and Scan" is a function used in
Windows Vista/ 7.
1 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
When the device's Scan Mode settings are in
"Simple Mode", please proceed to Step 4.
Otherwise, please carry out step 2 and 3.
2 Press the <SCAN> key.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
4 Click [Start] on your computer, and
select [All Programs]> [Windows FAX
and Scan].
5 Click [New Scan].
6 Select [MB4X1/ES41X1/MPS42X] (for
MB441, MB451, MB451w, MB461,
MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
ES4161 MFP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb)
or [MB4x1+LP/MPS47x] (for
MB461+LP, MB491+LP, MPS4700mb)
and click [OK].
7 Make additional setting if necessary.
8 Click [Scan].
9 Exit [Windows FAX and Scan].
Using ICA Driver
The ICA driver is not compatible with the
Windows OS.
The ICA driver supports the Mac OS X 10.6 to
10.8.
Start to read
Note
Some examples of image capture are used in the following
procedure. The steps and menus may differ depending on
the application you use.
1 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
When the device's Scan Mode settings are in
"Simple Mode", please proceed to Step 4.
Otherwise, please carry out step 2 and 3.
2 Press the <SCAN> key.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
4 Start image capture on your computer.
5 Select the machine from the list at the
left to the image capture screen.
6 Click the <Scan>.
Scanning will start.
7 From the [Image Capture], select
[Close Image Capture].
Change settings
You can adjust the document scan by changing
the current driver settings.
The following explains each item to set.
Display the detailed information
You can adjust the document scanning in details.
1 Follow steps 1 to 5 of "Start to read"
section.
2 Click on [Display the detailed
information].
3 Change the settings as required.
4 Click [Scan] to scan the document.
OK
OK
Using Drivers and Software
-43-
Scanning
3
Using ActKey Software
Using the ActKey, you can start a scan job in
specified settings with a click a button.
Memo
ActKey does not support Mac OS X.
When ActKey is installed, Network Configuration is also
installed simultaneously. For Network Configuration, refer
to "Using Network Configuration" P. 44.
Reference
For details on how to start a scan job, refer to the User's
Manual Advanced.
Installing the Software
1 Insert the "Software DVD-ROM" into your
computer.
A window opens.
2 Select [ActKey] from [Software].
3 Install the software as instructed.
4 Click [Finish].
Starting the Software
1 Click [Start] to select [All Programs] >
[Okidata] > [ActKey] > [ActKey].
Starting ActKey when Scanning to a
Local PC
You can set ActKey to start when you select
[Local PC] on the machine.
1 Click [Start] to select [Control Panel].
2 Enter [View scanners and cameras] in
[Search Control Panel].
3 Click the [View scanners and cameras]
under [Devices and Printers].
4 Select [MB4x1/ES41x1/MPS42x] (for
MB441, MB451, MB451w, MB461,
MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
ES4161 MFP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb)
or [MB4x1+LP/MPS47x] (for
MB461+LP, MB491+LP, MPS4700mb)
and click [Properties].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
5 Click the [Events] tab.
6 Select an event for [Select an event].
7 Select the [Start this program] check
box and then select [ActKey].
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 so that [ActKey] is
set to all events.
9 Click [OK].
Fax Transmission of Scanned
Documents
Using the fax service of the Windows component,
you can send a scanned document.
Note
The direction to load the paper cannot be changed after
scanning the documents.
This function uses the fax service of the Windows
component.
Memo
For PC-FAX function, the resolution is fixed to 200dpi and
the color mode is fixed to black and white.
1 Start ActKey on your computer.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
When the device's Scan Mode settings are in
"Simple Mode", please proceed to Step 5.
Otherwise, please carry out step 3 and 4.
3 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel of the machine.
4 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
5 Click [PC-Fax] scan button of ActKey on
your computer.
The [Fax Setup] starts.
6 Follow the on-screen instructions to send
a fax.
Setting the Scan Button
You can change the settings of four scan buttons.
1 Start ActKey.
2 Select [Button settings] from
[Options] menu.
3 Click a button you want to set.
4 Change the settings if necessary.
5 Click [OK].
OK
Using Drivers and Software
-44-
Using Network Configuration
Network Configuration is a tool to set in advance
when executing Scan To Local PC. In addition, if
the information including the device and IP
address of the computer, etc. is changed when
performing network scan, the setting value can
be changed by this tool.
When installing ActKey, Network Configuration is
also installed simultaneously.
Network Configuration will be automatically run
when you log on windows if you select it in task
tray menu.
When starting Network Configuration, the scanner
driver installed in the computer is displayed.
Note
Even when connected using a wireless LAN, the displayed
MAC address becomes the MAC address of the wired LAN.
Method to add a new network
scanner
To add a new network scanner, select [Add
Scanner] from the [Scanner] menu, and select
scanner driver name of the added scanner.
Method to change a scanner driver
name
When a scanner driver name has been changed,
select [Edit Driver Name] from the [Scanner]
menu and then change the scanner driver name.
Method to change the setting
information of the machine
When the IP address of the machine and port
number of the machine have been changed, start
Network Configuration and then select [Edit
Scanner] from the [Scanner] menu.
The setting value set in the current computer is
displayed, and then change the IP address and
port number of the machine.
Method to set Scan To Local PC
To execute Scan To Local PC, you need to register
the computer name, IP address and port number
in the machine.
After installing the scanner driver, start Network
Configuration and select the driver to be used.
Then, select [Properties] from the [Scanner]
menu and select the [Register] tab. As the
computer information, the computer name, IP
address and port number are displayed. The
computer name does not have to be set since the
computer's host name is automatically acquired.
Although the setting value of the computer is
automatically displayed for the IP address, if
multiple network cards are installed in the
computer, multiple IP addresses are displayed.
Select the IP address of the network card
currently used. Further more, for the port
number, the current setting is displayed. If you
need to change, change the setting.
After all settings are complete. Click [Register]
button to register the setting in the machine.
If the machine is tuned off and cannot be
connected, an error occurs when registering.
After registering, if the computer's name, IP
address or port number is changed, you need to
register again with the above procedure.
Using Drivers and Software
-45-
Scanning
3
Method to delete network-con-
nected PCs of the machine
If you registered several network-connected PCs
in the machine, you can delete them.
Select [Properties] from the [Scanner] menu
and select [Unregister] tab. The registered
information is displayed. Select the registered
information to be deleted from the machine, and
click [Unregister] button.
Useful Functions for Internet Faxing and Scan To E-mail
-46-
Useful Functions for Internet Faxing and Scan To
E-mail
This section explains useful functions for the Internet fax and scan to e-mail function.
MDN is a message to notify the sender about the status after the recipient has received the document.
DSN is a message to notify the sender about the delivery status if the transmitted document has
reached the recipient.
If the machine receives a DSN request, it will not send a response.
Memo
To ent e r [ Admin Setup] menu, a password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Note
To receive response from MDN or DSN, enable the setting of MDN and DSN requests, and make email reception settings in
advance.
Reference
For the reception setting of emails, refer to "Configuring Server to Print Files Attached to E-mails" P. 164.
Enabling MDN and DSN
Requests
Do the following procedure to request MDN and
DSN when you transmit Internet faxes and
emails.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press .
6 Press the to select [E-mail Setup]
and then press .
7 Press the to select [MCF Report] and
then press .
8 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
Enabling MDN Response
Do the following operation to transmit the MDN
response when the machine receives MDN
requests.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup] and
then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press .
6 Press the to select [E-mail Setup]
and then press .
7 Press the to select [MDN Response]
and then press .
8 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Useful Functions for Scanning to Local and Remote PCs
-47-
Scanning
3
Useful Functions for Scanning to Local and
Remote PCs
This section explains useful functions for scanning to local and remote PCs.
Memo
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, a password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Setting PC Scan Mode
You can select either simple scan mode or secure
scan mode for scanning to local PC function.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press .
6 Press the to select [PC Scan Mode]
and then press .
7 Press the to select a mode and then
press .
8 Press the until the top screen appears.
Enabling the Network TWAIN
Settings
Do the following procedure to use scan to the
local PC and scan to remote PC functions
connecting to network.
Note
If you select [Disable] on this function, you cannot use
scan to local PC and scan to remote PC via network.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press .
6 Press the to select [TWAIN Setup]
and then press .
7 Check that [Network TWAIN] is
selected and then press .
8 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Useful Functions for Scanning to Local and Remote PCs
-48-
Enabling the WSD Scan
To use both the Scan To Local PC (WSD Scan)
function and the Scan To Remote (WSD Scan)
function via the WSD Scan connection, follow the
steps below.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and press .
5 Press the to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press .
6 Press the to select [WSD Scan
Setup] and then press .
7 Check that [WSD Scan] is selected, and
then press .
8 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
Selecting the Dual-Side Scan
of WSD Scan function
To enable the Dual-Side Scan of the Scan To
Local PC (WSD Scan) function and Scan To
Remote (WSD Scan) function, follow the steps
below.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and press .
5 Press the to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press .
6 Press the to select [WSD Scan
Setup] and then press .
7 Press the to select [Binding] and
then press .
8 Select [Long Edge Bind] or [Short
Edge Bind] according to the scan
document, and press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
-49-
Printing
4
4. Printing
This chapter explains advanced printing operations.
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
This section explains useful operations when you print a document from a computer.
Memo
The display and procedure may differ according to the operating system, the applications, and the version of the printer driver
you are using. This section uses Wordpad and TextEdit in Windows and Mac OS X as examples.
For the MB441, MB461, MB461+LP and ES4161 MFP, "Mp tray" refers to the "Manual Feeder".
Reference
For additional information on the setting items on the printer driver, refer to its online help.
Manual Printing
You can print a document feeding paper
manually on the MP tray. The machine prints on a
sheet of paper at a time. Every time a page is
printed, a message appears requesting to load
paper on the MP tray. Select [Start] on the
message to continue to print.
1 Load paper on the MP tray.
2 Open the file you want to print.
3 Configure the print settings on the
printer driver and start printing.
For MB441/MB461/MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP Windows PCL/PCL XPS
Printer Driver
1 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2 Click [Preferences].
3 On the [Setup] tab, select [Manual]
from [Source].
4 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
5 When a request message appears on the
operator panel for loading paper on the
MP tray, press the or to select
[Start] and then press .
If you print a document of multiple pages, every
time a page is printed the same message appears.
For MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Windows
PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver
1
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2 Click [Preferences].
3 On the [Setup] tab, select
[Multipurpose Tray] from [Source].
4 Click [Paper Feed Options].
5 Select the [Use MP tray as manual
feed] check box and then click [OK].
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
7 When a request message appears on the
operator panel for loading paper on the
MP tray, press the or to select
[Start] and then press .
If you print a document of multiple pages, every
time a page is printed the same message appears.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2 Click [Preferences].
3 Select the [Paper/Quality] tab.
4 Select [Multi-Purpose Tray] from
[Paper Source].
5 Click [Advanced].
6 Click [Multipurpose tray is handled as
manual feed] and select [Yes] from the
drop-down list.
OK
OK
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-50-
7 Click [OK].
8 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing on the print dialog.
9 If a request message appears on the
operator panel for loading paper on the
MP tray, press the or to select
[Start] and then press .
If you print a document of multiple pages, every
time a page is printed the same message appears.
For MB441/MB461/MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP Mac OS X PCL Printer
Driver
1 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2 Select [Setup] from the menu.
3 Select [Manual Feed] from [Paper
Source].
4 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
5 When a request message appears on the
operator panel for loading paper on the
Manual tray, press the or to select
[Start] and then press .
If you print a document of multiple pages, every
time a page is printed the same message appears.
For MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Mac OS X
PCL Printer Driver
1
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2 Select [Setup] from the menu.
3 Select [Multi Purpose Tray] from
[Paper Source].
4 Click [Printer Options].
5 Select [Feed manually from
Multipurpose tray] check box and then
click [OK].
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
7 When a request message appears on the
operator panel for loading paper on the
MP tray, press the or to select
[Start] and then press .
If you print a document of multiple pages, every
time a page is printed the same message appears.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2 Select [Paper Feed] from the panel
menu.
3 Select [All] and then select [Multi-
Purpose Tray].
4 Select [Printer Features] from the
panel menu.
5 Select [Insert Options] from [Feature
Sets].
6 Select [Multipurpose tray is handled
as manual feed] check box.
7 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
8 When a request message appears on the
operator panel for loading paper on the MP
tray, press the or to select [Start]
and then press .
If you print a document of multiple pages, every
time a page is printed the same message appears.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
OK
OK
OK
OK
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-51-
Printing
4
Printing on Envelopes
You can print on envelopes by changing the
paper size setting, and using the MP tray
(MB441/MB461/MB461+LP/ES4161 MFP: Manual
Feeder) and the face up stacker.
Set the paper size of MP tray on the operator
panel, and then make print settings including
paper size and paper tray with the printer driver.
Note
Warp or creasing may appear after printing. Make sure
that there is no problem by test printing.
Envelopes should be loaded with the address side up.
- You envelopes (Monarch, Com-9, Com-10, DL, C5, C6)
should be loaded so that the flap is on the right side to
the feeding direction.
Memo
Do not select duplex printing on envelopes.
Reference
For available envelopes refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Manual printing is also available for printing on envelopes.
For details on manual printing, refer to "Manual Printing" P. 49.
1 Load paper on the MP tray and then
press the set button.
2 Open the face up stacker at the rear of
the machine.
3 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
4 Press the to select [Paper Setup] and
then press .
5 Press the to select [MP Tray] and
then press .
6 Make sure [Paper Size] is selected and
then press .
7 Press the to select any of
[Envelope*] and then press .
*Select a type of envelope.
8 Press the until the top screen appears.
9 Open the file you want to print on the
computer.
10 Configure the paper size, paper source
and orientation on the printer driver and
then start printing.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
1 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2 Click [Preferences].
3 On the [Setup] tab, select any of
[Envelope*] from [Size].
* Select a type of envelope.
4 Select [Multipurpose Tray] from
[Source].
5 Select the [Setup] tab.
6 Select orientation from [Orientation].
- Select [Portrait] for Chou envelopes.
- Select [Landscape] for You envelopes.
7 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2 Click [Preferences].
3 On the [Layout] tab, select orientation
from [Orientation].
- Select [Portrait] for Chou envelopes.
- Select [Landscape] for You envelopes. Click
[Advanced] and select [Rotate] from [Page
Rotate] on the advanced options screen.
4 Select the [Paper/Quality] tab.
5 Select [Multi-Purpose Tray] from
[Source].
6 Click [Advanced].
7 Click [Paper Size] and select any of
[Envelope*] from the drop-down list.
* Select a type of envelope.
8 Click [OK].
9 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
OK
OK
OK
OK
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-52-
For Mac OS X PCL Printer Driver
1 From the [File] menu, select [Page
Setup
].
2 Select any of [Envelope*] from [Paper
Size].
* Select a type of envelope.
3
Select orientation from [
Orientation
]
and then click [
OK
].
4
From the [
File
] menu, select [
Print
].
5
Select [
Setup
] from the panel
menu.
6
Select [
Paper Source
] and then select
[
Multipurpose Tray
].
7
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1 From the [File] menu, select [Page
Setup].
2 Select any of [Envelope*] from [Paper
Size].
* Select a type of envelope.
3 Select orientation from [Orientation]
and then click [OK].
- Select [Portrait] for Chou envelopes, and check
the checkbox of [Page Rotate] in the [Job
Options] function set on the [Printer Features]
panel.
- Select [Landscape] for You envelopes.
4 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
5 Select [Paper Feed] from the panel
menu.
6 Select [All] and then select [Multi-
Purpose Tray].
7 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
Printing on Labels
You can print on labels by changing the media
type setting, and using the MP tray and the face-
up stacker.
Set the paper size and type for MP tray on the
operator panel. Then, make print settings
including paper size and paper tray with the
printer driver.
Memo
Do not select duplex printing on labels.
Reference
For available labels, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Manual printing is also available for printing on labels. For
details on manual printing, refer to "Manual Printing" P. 49.
1 Load paper on the MP tray and then
press the set button.
2 Open the face up stacker at the rear of
the machine.
3 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
4 Press the to select [Paper Setup] and
then press .
5 Press the to select [MP Tray] and
then press .
6 Make sure [Paper Size] is selected and
then press .
7 Press the to select [A4] or [Letter]
and then press .
8 Press the to select [Media Type] and
then press .
9 Press the to select the [Labels] and
then press .
10 Press the until the top screen appears.
11 Open the file you want to print on the
computer.
12 Configure the paper size and tray on the
printer driver.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-53-
Printing
4
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
1 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2 Click [Preferences].
3 Select [A4] or [Letter] from [Size] on
the [Setup] tab.
4 Select [Multipurpose Tray] from
[Source].
5 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2 Click [Preferences].
3 Select [Paper/Quality] tab.
4 Select [Multi-Purpose Tray] from
[Paper Source].
5 Click [Advanced].
6 Click [Paper Size] and then select [A4]
or [Letter] from the drop-down list.
7 Click [OK].
8 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PCL/PS Printer Driver
1
From the [File] menu, select [Page
Setup].
2 Select [A4] or [Letter] from [Paper
Size].
3 Select [Print] from [File] menu.
4 If the PS printer driver: Select [Feed
Paper] from the panel menu.
If the PCL printer driver: Select [Setup]
from the panel menu.
5 If the PS printer driver: Select [All] and
then select [Multi-Purpose Tray].
If the PCL printer driver: Select [Paper
Source] and then select [Multipurpose
Tray].
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
Printing on Custom Size Paper
You can register a customized paper size on the
printer driver so you can print on nonstandard
paper such as banners.
Settable custom size range
Width: 86 to 216mm
Length: 140 to 1321mm
Paper size that can be fed is different depending
on a tray.
Note
Register a paper size and load paper in portrait
orientation.
This function may not be available in some applications.
If paper length exceeds 356mm, we do not guarantee
print quality.
If paper is so long that it exceeds the paper supports of
the MP tray, support it by hand.
When using tray 1 or tray 2, select the <SETTING> key
on the operator panel>[Paper Setup] >[Tray 1] or [Tray
2]> [Paper Size]>[Custom] before doing the following
procedure.
When image is not correctly printed on large size paper in
the PS printer driver, by selecting [Standard
(600x600dpi)] for [Print Quality], image may be
correctly printed.
It is not recommended to use paper whose with is less
than 100mm since it may cause paper jams.
Reference
For details on the paper sizes that can be fed on each tray,
that can be used for duplex printing, or that can be
registered for custom paper sizes, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
The [Auto tray change] check box is selected by default.
When the tray runs out of paper during printing, the
machine automatically locates another tray and begins
feeding paper from that tray. If you want to feed custom
paper only from a particular tray, clear the [Auto tray
change] check box. For auto tray change, refer to "Auto
Tray Switching" P. 61.
For Windows PCL Printer Driver
1 Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MB491(PCL)].
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-54-
3 On the [Setup] tab, click [Paper Feed
Options].
4 Click [Custom Size].
5 Enter a name and the dimensions.
a) Enter a name for the new size in the
[
Name] box.
b) Enter its dimensions in the [
Width] and
[
Length] boxes.
6 Click [Add] to save the custom paper
size to the list and then click [OK].
You can save up to 32 custom sizes.
7 Press [OK] until the [Printing
Preferences] dialog box is closed.
8 Open the file you want to print.
9 Select the registered paper size and start
printing on the print dialog.
Reference
For how to specify paper in the printer driver, refer to
User's Manual Basic.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1 Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MB491(PS)].
3 On the [Layout] tab, click [Advanced].
4 Click [Paper Size] and select
[PostScript Custom Page Size] from
the drop-down list.
5 Enter the dimensions in the [Width] and
[Height] boxes, and press [OK].
Note
[Offset for Paper Feeder Size] is not available.
6 Press [OK] until the [Print Setup]
dialog box is closed.
7 Open the file you want to print from the
application.
8 Select [PostScript Custom Page Size]
for a paper size and start printing on the
printer driver.
Reference
For how to specify paper in the printer driver, refer to
User's Manual Basic.
For Windows PCL XPS Printer Driver
1
Click [
Start
] and select [
Devices and Printers
].
2 Click a printer icon in [Printers and
Faxes] and then click [Print server
properties] on the top bar.
3 Select the [Forms] tab.
4 Select the [Create a new form] check
box.
5 Enter the values in the [Form name],
[Paper size], and [Printer area
margins]. Click [Save Form].
6 Click [Close].
7 Open the file you want to print from the
application.
8 Select the registered paper size and start
printing on the printer driver.
Reference
For how to specify paper in the printer driver, refer to
User's Manual Basic.
For Mac OS X PCL/PS Printer Driver
Note
In the Mac OS X printer driver, paper size out of the
available range can be set, however, image is not correctly
printed. set paper size within available range.
1 Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [
File
] menu, select [
Page Setup
].
3 Select [Manage Custom Sizes] from
[Paper Size]
4 Click [+] to add an item to the list of
custom paper sizes.
5 Double-click [Untitled] and enter a
name for the custom paper size.
6 Enter the dimensions in the [Width] and
[Height] boxes.
7 Click [OK].
8 Click [OK].
9 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
10 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-55-
Printing
4
Combining Multiple Pages
Onto One Sheet of Paper
You can print multiple pages of a document onto
a single side of a sheet of paper.
Note
This function scales down the page size of your document
for printing. The center of the printed image may not be in
the center of the paper.
This function may not be available in some applications.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 On the [Setup] tab, select the number of
pages to print on each sheet at
[Finishing Mode].
5 Click [Options].
6 Specify each setting at [Page Borders],
[Page layout], and [Bind Margin], and
then click [OK].
7 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 On the [Layout] tab, select the number
of pages to print on each sheet from
[Pages per Sheet].
5 Specify the following settings.
- Select the [Draw Borders]
check box to draw borders between pages on each
sheet.
- Select [Advanced]>[Pages per Sheet Layout]
to set the layout of pages on each sheet.
Note
[Draw Borders] and [Pages per Sheet Layout] are
not available with Windows Server 2003, and
Windows XP.
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PCL/PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Layout] from the panel menu.
4 Select the number of pages to print on
each sheet from [Pages per Sheet]
5 Specify each setting at [Border] and
[Layout Direction].
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
Making Duplex Prints
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Paper size that can be used for duplex printing
A4, B5, Letter, Legal13, Legal 13.5, Legal 14,
Executive, 16K (197x273mm, 195x270mm,
184x260mm) Custom size
A5, A6, Statement, DL, C5, C6, Com-9, Com-10,
Monarch cannot be used for duplex printing.
Media weight that can be used for duplex printing
60~122g/m
2
Using media weight other than the above causes
paper jams, therefore do not use.
Note
When performing duplex printing with the face-up stacker
opened, the message indicating that the face-up stacker
should be closed on the display of the operator panel.
At this moment, by closing the face-up stacker, you can
restart printing.
This function may not be available in some applications.
Memo
The width and length of custom size that can be used for
duplex printing are as follows.
- Width: 182 to 215.9mm (7.2 to 8.5 inch)
- Length: 257 to 356mm (10.1 to 14.0 inch)
1 Check that the face-up stacker on the
rear size of the machine is closed.
2 Make print settings for duplex printing
with the printer driver of the computer
and then start printing.
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-56-
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4
On the [
Setup
] tab, select [
Long Edge
] or
[
Short Edge
] from [
2-Sided Printing
].
5 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 On the [Layout] tab, select [Flip on
Long Edge] or [Flip on Short Edge]
from [Print on Both Sides].
5 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PCL/PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 If the PS printer driver: Select [Layout]
from the panel menu.
If the PCL printer driver: Select [Setup]
from the panel menu.
4
If the PS printer driver: Select [
Long-
Edge binding
] or [
Short-Edge binding
]
from [
Two-Sided
] on the [
Layout
] panel.
If the PCL printer driver:
Select [
Long-
Edge Binding
] or [
Short-Edge Binding
]
from [
Duplex
] .
5 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
Scaling to Pages
You can print data formatted for one size page
onto a different size page without modifying the
print data.
Note
This function may not be available in some applications.
This function is not available with the Windows PS printer
driver.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 On the [Setup] tab, select [Paper Feed
Options].
5
Select the [
Resize document to fit printer
page
] check box in [
Fit to Page
].
6
Select a scaling value from [
Conversion
]
and click [
OK
].
7
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PCL/PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Paper Handling] from the panel
menu.
4 Select the [Scale to fit paper size]
check box.
5 Select the paper size you want to use
from [Destination paper Size]. (For
Mac OS X 10.5 to 10.8)
Select the paper size you want to use
from [Scale to fit Paper Size]. (For
Mac OS X10.4)
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-57-
Printing
4
Collating Pages
You can print copies of multiple sets of a
multipage document.
Note
This function may not be available in some applications.
Turn off the page collating mode in the application when
you use this function with the Windows PS and Mac OS X
PS printer driver.
This function is not available with the Windows PCL printer
driver.
For Windows PCL XPS/PS Printer
Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Select [Job Options] tab.
5 Select the number of print copies from
[Copies], and check the [Collate] box.
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PCL Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Paper Handling] from the panel
menu. (For Mac OS X 10.7 to 10.8)
Select [Copies & Pages] from the panel
menu. (For Mac OS X 10.4)
4 Check the [Collate Pages] box. (For
Mac OS X 10.7 to 10.8)
Check the [Collated] box. ( For Mac OS X
10.4 to 10.6)
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Printer Features] from the
panel menu.
4 Select [Job Options] from [Feature
Sets].
5 Check the [Collated] box.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Mac OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking the
triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Mac OS X
10.5 to 10.6.
Setting the Page Order
You can set whether pages are printed in forward
or reverse order to suit your needs.
If you want pages to be stacked in numeric order,
forward order is usually appropriate with the face
down stacker, and reverse order with the face up
stacker.
If using a face-up stacker, set the printing to run
in the reverse order to stack the paper in the
order of the pages.
Note
Reverse order is not available with the Windows PCL/PCL
XPS printer driver.
If the face up stacker is not opened, pages are output on
the face down stacker.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 On the [Layout] tab, select [Front to
Back] or [Back to Front] from [Page
Order].
5 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
If [Page Order] does not appear, click [Start]>[Devices
and Printers]> right-click the OKI MB491 icon > select
[Printer properties]>[OKI MB491(PS)]>[Advanced]
>[Enable advanced printing features].
For Mac OS X PCL/PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Paper Handling] from the panel
menu.
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-58-
4 Select [Normal] or [Reverse] from
[Page Order] on the [Paper Handling]
panel.
5 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
Booklet Printing
You can print multipage documents with their
pages ordered and arranged so that the final
printed output can be folded into a booklet.
Note
This function may not be available in some applications.
This function is not available with the Windows PCL printer
driver and the Mac OS X printer driver.
Watermarks are not printed properly with this function.
This function is not available when executing encrypted
authentication printing from the client computer that
shares the machine in the network by the print server.
For Windows PCL XPS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 On the [Setup] tab, select [Booklet] at
[Finishing Mode].
5 Click on [Options] and set the binding
and print options as required.
[Signature]: Specifies a unit of pages to be bound.
[
Right to Left]:Print the booklet to be opened toward
the right hand.
6 Click [OK].
7 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
When you make an A5-size booklet using A4-size papers, set
the [
Size
] option to [
A4
] on the [
Setup
] tab.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 On the [Layout] tab, select [Booklet] at
[Page Format].
If you want to print boarder lines, select the
[Draw Borders] check box to draw borders.
5 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
When you want to make an A5 booklet using A4 sheets,
select [A4] for the paper size.
When making a booklet whose right side is bound (The
right side is bound when the first page is the front), click
[Advanced] on the [Layout] tab and select [Right edge]
for [Booklet binding].
[Booklet binding] cannot be used in Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003.
If you cannot use this function, click [
Start
]>[
Devices and
Printers
]> right-click the OKI MB491 icon > select [
Printer
properties
]>[
OKI MB491(PS)
]>[
Advanced
]> select the
[
Enable advanced printing features
] check box.
Cover Printing
You can feed the first page of a print job from
one tray and the remaining pages from another
tray. This function is useful when you want to use
a kind of paper for a cover and another for body
pages.
Note
This function is not available with the Windows PCL/PS
printer driver.
For Windows PCL XPS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 On the [Setup] tab, select [Paper Feed
Options].
5 Check [Use different source for first
page].
6 Select a paper tray from [Source], and
click [OK].
Select a paper thickness from the [Weight] as
required.
7 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PCL/PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [
Cover Page
] from the panel menu.
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-59-
Printing
4
4 From the [Print Cover Page] menu,
select [Before document].
5 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
Changing Print Quality
You can change the print quality to suit your needs
.
Memo
[Normal (600X600)] may produce better results for
printing on a larger size of paper with the PS printer driver.
For Windows Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Select the [Job Options] tab.
5 Select a print quality level at [Quality].
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PCL Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [
Job Options
] from the panel menu.
4 Select a print quality level from [Print
Quality].
5 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Printer Features] from the
panel menu.
4 Select [Job Options] from [Feature
Sets].
5
Select a print quality level from [
Quality
].
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
Emphasizing Fine Lines
You can print fine lines and small characters clearer.
Memo
This function is turned on by default.
This function is not available with the Windows PCL printer
driver.
With some applications, if this function is turned on, the
spaces in bar codes may become too narrow. If this
happens, turn off this function.
For Windows PS/PCL XPS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Select the [Job Options] tab.
5 Click the [Advanced].
6 Select the [Adjust ultra fine lines]
check box and then click [OK].
7 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-60-
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Printer Features] from the
panel menu.
4 Select [Job Option] from [Feature
Sets].
5 Select the [Adjust ultra fine lines]
check box.
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
Auto Tray Selection
You can switch paper feed trays with the same
size of paper configured on the printer driver
automatically.
First, set MP tray to be a target tray for auto
selection on the operator panel. Then, set the
auto selection of the tray with the printer driver.
Note
Make sure to set a paper size for Tray1, Tray2 (optional)
and MP tray. Available paper size differs depending on
each tray. For details, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Tray2 (optional) can only be used on MB461/MB461+LP/
MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4161
MFP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb.
Memo
In the default settings, the [MP tray Usage] is [Do Not
Use]. In such a case, MP tray is not supported by the auto
tray switching function.
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, you will need an
administrator password. The default password is "aaaaaa".
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Print Setup] and
then press .
6 Check that [Print Menu] is selected and
then press .
7 Check that [Tray Configuration] is
selected and then press .
8 Press the to select [MP Tray Usage]
and then press .
9 Press the to select [When
Mismatching] and then press .
10 Press the until the top screen appears.
11 Specify a paper tray on the printer driver
and start printing.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 On the [Setup] tab, select [Auto] from
[Source].
5 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Select the [Paper/Quality] tab.
5 Select [Automatically Select] from
[Paper Source].
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PCL Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Setup] from the panel menu.
4 Select [Auto] from [Paper Source].
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-61-
Printing
4
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Paper Feed] from the panel menu.
4 Select [All pages] and select [Auto Select].
5 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
Auto Tray Switching
You can switch paper feed trays automatically.
When the tray runs out of paper while printing,
the machine locates another tray with the same
size of paper configured on the printer driver and
begins feeding paper from that tray.
This function is effective for large print jobs.
First, set MP tray to be a target tray for auto
switching on the operator panel. Then, set the
auto switching of the tray with the printer driver.
Note
Make sure to set the same values (paper size, media type,
media weight) for each tray used for auto tray switching.
Available paper size differs depending on each tray. For
details, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Memo
In the default settings, the [MP tray Usage] is [Do Not
Use]. In such a case, MP tray is not supported by the auto
tray switching function.
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, you will need an
administrator password. The default password is "aaaaaa".
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Print Setup] and
then press .
6 Check that [Print Menu] is selected and
then press .
7 Check that [Tray Configuration] is
selected and then press .
8 Press the to select [MP Tray Usage]
and then press .
9 Press the to select [When
Mismatching] and then press .
10 Press the until the top screen appears.
11 Configure the paper source setting on
the print dialog.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Click [Paper Feed Options] on the
[Setup] tab.
5 Check the [Auto tray change] box and
then click [OK].
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Click [Advanced] on the [Layout] tab.
5 Select [On] from [Tray Switch].
6 Click [OK].
7 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PCL Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Setup] from the panel menu.
4 Click [Printer Options].
5 Check the [Auto Tray Switch] box.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-62-
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
For Mac OS X 10.5 to 10.8
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Printer Functions] from the
panel menu.
4 Select [Paper Feed Options] from
[Feature Sets].
5 Check the [Tray Switch] box.
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
For Mac OS X 10.4.0 to 10.4.11
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Error handling] from the panel
menu.
4 Select [Switch to another cassette
with the same paper size].
5 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Saving Toner
You can print your documents using less toner.
You can select the following option.
Memo
The density of the printed images with this function may
vary in degree, depending on the document being printed.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS/PS
Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Select the [Job Options] tab.
5 Select from the [Toner Saving :].
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PCL Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [
Job Options
] from the panel menu.
4 Select from the [Toner save].
5 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Printer Features] from the
panel menu.
4
Select [
Job Options
] from [
Feature Sets
].
5
Select from the [
Toner Saving
].
6 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
Open the Detailed Setup Menu by pressing the [Show
Details] button in Max OS X 10.7 to 10.8 or by clicking
the triangle symbol at the side of [Printer] menu in Max
OS X 10.5 to 10.6.
Printer setting: Conforms to the device
setting
Off:
Printing at a normal density
without saving toner
Save Level Low: Printing at a somewhat
lower density
Save Level High: Printing at a very low
density
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-63-
Printing
4
Secure Printing (for MB491/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
You can assign a password to a print job so it can
only be printed if the password is input at the
operator panel.
In order to use this function, the machine must
be equipped with an SD memory card.
Note
If there is not enough space on the SD memory card for
the spooled data, a message indicating the file system is
full appears and the print job does not start.
This function is not available with the Windows PCL XPS
printer driver and the Mac OS X printer driver.
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Select the [Job Options] tab.
5 Select [Secure Print] at [Job Type].
6 Enter a job name in the [Job Name] box
and a password in the [Personal ID
Number] box.
If you select the [
Request Job Name for each
print job
] check box, a prompt for the job name
appears when you send the print job to the machine.
7 Click [OK].
8 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
The print job is sent to the machine, but is not
printed.
9 Press the <PRINT> key on the operator
panel.
10 Press the to select [Print Job] and
then press .
11 Press the to select [Stored Job] and
then press .
12 Enter your password set in step 6 in the
[Password] box and then press to
start a job searching.
- Press the <CLEAR> key if you enter a wrong
number.
- Press the <STOP> key if you want to stop the job
search.
13 Make sure [Print] is selected and press .
If you select [Delete], you can cancel the print job.
14 Enter the number of copies and then
press .
Note
If you forget your password set for a job and do not print
the job transmitted to the machine, the job remains in the
SD memory card.
The print job stored on the SD memory card is
automatically deleted after printing.
Encrypted Secure Printing
(for MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
You can encrypt your documents before sending
them from a computer to the machine.
Therefore, you can prevent unauthorized access
to confidential information.
The document is unprinted and stored in an
encrypted format on the SD memory card in the
machine until you enter the registered password
at the operator panel.
The print job stored on the SD memory card is
automatically deleted after printing or if it is not
printed for more than a certain period of time. If
an error occurs when the data is sent or if an
unauthorized person is detected trying to access
the job, it is automatically deleted.
Note
If there is not enough space on the SD memory card for
the spooled data, a message indicating the file system is
full appears and the print job does not start.
This function is not available with printer drivers for the 64-
bit editions of Windows 8, Windows Server 2012, Windows
7, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows
Server 2008,Windows Server 2003, and Windows XP.
This function is not available with the Windows PCL XPS
printer driver and the Mac OS X printer driver.
You cannot use this function with the poster printing mode
and the booklet mode with the Windows PCL printer driver
if you share the machine with a print server.
When you use this function, clear the [Give Priority to
the host release] check box.
[Desktop] > [Charm bar] (displayed by moving the mouse
cursor to the top-right corner of the screen or by clicking the
right of the screen) > [Setup] > [Control Panel] >
[Displaying Devices and Printers] > OKI MB491 Icon >
[Printer properties] > [OKI MB491(PS)] > [Device
Settings] > [Print only Encrypted data] cannot be
enabled with Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012.
[Start] > [Devices and Printers] > OKI MB491 Icon >
[Printer properties] > [OKI MB491(PS)] > [Device
Settings] > [Print only Encrypted data] cannot be
enabled with Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2.
[Start] > [Operator panel] > [Printers] > OKI MB491
Icon > [Properties] > [OKI MB491(PS)] > [Device
Settings] > [Print only Encrypted data] cannot be
enabled with Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-64-
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Select the [Job Options] tab.
5 Select [Encrypted Secure Print].
6 Enter a password in the [Password] box
and configure other options if necessary.
Reference
For details on the options, refer to the on-screen
explanations of the driver.
7 Click [OK].
8 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
The print job is sent to the machine, but is not printed.
9 Press the <PRINT> key on the operator
panel.
10 Press the to select [Print Job] and
then press .
11 Press the to select [Encrypted Job]
and then press .
12
Enter the password you set in step 6 in the
[
Password
] box and then press
to
start a job searching.
- Press the <CLEAR> key if you enter a wrong
number.
- Press the <STOP> key if you want to stop the job
search.
13 Make sure [Print] is selected and press .
If you select [Delete], you can delete the print
job, and all of the encrypted jobs with the same
password are deleted as well.
Watermark Printing
You can print pages with a watermark or text.
Note
This function is not available with the Mac OS X printer driver.
Watermarks are not printed properly for booklet printing.
For Windows Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [
File
] menu, select [
Print
].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Select [Job Options] tab.
5 Click [Watermark].
6 Click [New].
7 Specify text, a size and an angle for the
watermark and then click [OK].
8 Click [OK].
9 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Note
Watermarks are printed over the text or images of
documents in the default settings with the Windows PS.
printer driver. To print in the background of documents,
check the [In Background] box in the [Watermark]
window.
When the [Background] is checked on the [Watermark]
window, depending on an application you use, the
watermark may not be printed. In such a case, uncheck
[Background].
Overlay Printing
You can print overlays such as logos or forms on
documents.
The machine must be equipped with an SD
memory card for this function.
Note
This function is not available with the Windows PCL XPS
printer driver and the Mac OS X printer driver.
To use this function on a Windows PS printer driver, you
need to log into your computer as an administrator.
1 Create an overlay with the Configuration
Tool and register it on the machine.
2 Define the overlay on the printer driver
and start printing.
For Windows PCL Printer Driver
Memo
Overlay is a group of forms. Three forms can be registered
in an overlay.
The forms are printed over in a registered order. The form
registered last is printed at the top.
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Select the [Job Options] tab.
5 Click [Vector] of [Print Mode].
OK
OK
OK
OK
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-65-
Printing
4
6 Click [Overlay].
7 Select the [Print Using Active
Overlays] check box.
8 Click [Define Overlays].
9 Enter a name for the overlay in the
[Overlay Name] box.
10 Enter the ID of the form you registered
in the Configuration Tool in the [ID
Value(s)].
11 Select the pages of the document on
which to print the overlay from the
[Print on Pages] drop-down list.
12 Click [Add].
13 Click [Close].
14 Select the overlay to use from the
[Defined Overlays] and click [Add].
15 Click [OK].
16 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
Memo
An overlay is a form group. You can register three forms
with one overlay.
1 Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MB491(PS)].
3 Select the [Job Options] tab.
4 Click [Overlays].
5 Select [Use Overlay] from the
dropdown list and click [New].
6 Enter the exact name of the overlay you
registered in the Configuration Tool in
the [Form Name] box and click [Add].
7 Enter a name for the overlay in the
[Overlay Name] box
8 Select the page of the document on
which to print the overlay from the
[Print on Pages] drop-down list.
9 Click [OK].
10 Select the overlay to use from the
[Defined Overlay] list and then click
[Add].
11 Click [OK].
12 Click [OK] to close the print setup dialog
box.
13 Open the file you want to print.
14 Start printing on the print dialog.
Storing Print Data (for MB491/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
You can store print data on the SD memory card
installed on the machine and print it as needed
from the operator panel by entering a password.
Note
If there is not enough space on the SD memory card for
the spooled data, a message indicating the file system is
full appears and the print job does not start.
This function is not available with the Windows PCL XPS
printer driver and the Mac OS X printer driver
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Select the [Job Options] tab.
5 Check [Store to SD].
6 Enter a job name in the [Job Name] box
and a password in the [Personal ID
Number] box.
If you check the [Request Job Name for each
print job] box, a prompt for the job name
appears when you send the job to the machine.
7 Click [OK].
8 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
The print job is sent to the machine, but is not
printed.
9 Press the <PRINT> key on the operator
panel.
10 Press the to select [Print Job] and
then press .
OK
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-66-
11 Press the to select [Stored Job] and
then press .
12 Enter the password you set in step 6 in
the [Password] box and then press
to start a job searching.
- Press the <CLEAR> key if you enter a wrong
number.
- Press the <STOP> key if you want to stop the job
search.
13 Make sure [Print] is selected and then
press .
If you select [Delete], you can delete the print
job.
14 Enter the number of copies and then
press .
Reference
You can delete stored print data with the Configuration
To ol .
The print job stored on the SD memory card remains after
printing.
Saving the Driver Settings
You can save the printer driver settings.
Note
This function is not available with the Windows PS printer
driver, the Mac OS X printer driver and the Fax driver.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
Saving the Settings
1 Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and then
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MB491(*)].
*Select the type of driver you want to use.
3 Configure the print settings to save.
4 On the [Setup] tab, click [Save] at
[Driver Settings].
5 Specify a name for the setting to save
and then click [OK].
If you select the [Include media settings] check
box, the paper configuration on the [Setup] tab is
also saved.
6 Click [OK] to close the print setup dialog
box.
Memo
Up to 14 forms can be stored.
Using the Saved Settings
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 On the [Setup] tab, select a setting you
want to use from [Driver Settings].
5 Start printing.
Changing the Driver's Default
Settings
You can use print settings often used as the
printer driver's default settings.
For Windows Printer Driver
1 Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and then
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MB491(*)].
*Select the type of driver you want to use.
3 Configure the print settings to use as the
driver's default setting.
4 Click [OK].
For Mac OS X PCL/PS Printer Driver
1 Open a file.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Configure the print settings to use as the
driver's default settings.
4 Select [Save Current Settings as
Preset...] from [Presets]. (For Mac OS
X 10.7 to 10.8)
Select [Save As] from [Presets]. (For
Mac OS X 10.4 to 10.6)
5 Enter a name for the settings and click
[OK].
OK
OK
OK
OK
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-67-
Printing
4
6 Click [Cancel].
Note
To use the saved settings, select the name from [Presets]
in the print dialog.
Using Printer Fonts
You can print your documents using pre-installed
printer fonts by substituting them for TrueType
fonts in the computer.
Note
The printer fonts do not exactly duplicate the appearance
of the TrueType fonts seen on screen.
This function is not available with the Windows PCL XPS
printer driver and the Mac OS X printer driver.
To use this function with the Windows PS printer driver you
must be logged on your computer as an administrator.
This function is not available in some applications.
For Windows PCL Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Select the [Job Options] tab.
5 Click [Font].
6 Select the [Font Substitution] check
box.
7 Specify which printer font you substitute
for each TrueType font in the [Font
Substitution Table].
8 Click [OK].
9 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1 Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and then
select [Printer properties]>[OKI
MB491(PS)].
3 Select the [Device Settings] tab.
4 Substitute a printer font for each TrueType
font in the [Font Substitution Table].
To specify the font substitution, click each
TrueType font and select a printer font to
substitute from the pull-down menu.
5 Click [OK].
6 Open the file you want to print.
7 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
8 Click [Preferences].
9 On the [Layout] tab, click [Advanced].
10 Select [Substitute Device Font] at
[TrueType Font] and then click [OK].
11 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Using Computer Fonts
You can print your documents using TrueType
fonts in the computer to retain the font
appearance on screen.
Note
This function is not available with the Windows PCL XPS
printer driver and the Mac OS X PS printer driver.
For Windows PCL Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 Select the [Job Options] tab.
5 Click [Font].
6 Clear the [Font Substitution] check box
and then click [OK].
-[Download as Outline Font]
Font images are created by the printer.
-[Download as Bitmap Font]
Font images are created by the printer driver
7 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 On the [Layout] tab, click [Advanced].
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-68-
5 Click [TrueType Font] and select
[Download as Softfont] from the
dropdown list.
6 Click [OK].
7 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Printing to File
You can print a document to a file, without
printing it out on paper.
Note
You must be logged on your computer as an administrator.
For Windows Printer Driver
1 Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and then
select [Printer properties]>[OKI
MB491(*)].
*Select the type of driver you want to use.
3 Select the [Ports] tab.
4 Select [FILE:] from the port list and click
[OK].
5 Start printing on the print dialog.
6 Enter the name of a file and then click
[OK].
For Mac OS X PCL/PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [PDF] on the print dialog and select
a file format.
4 Enter the name of a file and select where
to save it in and click [Save].
Printing E-mail Attached Files
The machine can print the attached files
automatically when it receives an e-mail. To use
this function you have to configure the email
reception setting.
Note
The following file formats are supported:
- TIFF (V6 Baseline)
- PDF * (v1.7)
-JPEG *
*MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/MB491/
MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb Only.
They differ depending on the file page size and the file
format what size of paper an attached file is printed on and
whether to enable the fitting function. For the other
printing settings for the number of copies or whether to do
duplex printing, the current settings configured on the
[Admin Setup] menu are applied.
Memo
Up to 10 files and a maximum of 8 MB for each file can be
printed.
Reference
For details on how to configure the settings to print e-mail
attached files, refer to "Configuring Server to Print Files
Attached to E-mails" P. 164 or the User's Manual Basic.
Downloading PS Files
You can download PostScript files to the machine
and print them.
Note
This function is available only when you are using a TCP/IP
network.
For OKI LPR Utility
1
Launch the OKI LPR Utility.
2 Select [Download] from the [Remote
Print] menu.
3 Select the file to download and click
[Open].
After finishing the download, the PostScript file is
printed.
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
-69-
Printing
4
Printing Out PS Errors
You can print out a PostScript error when it
occurs.
Note
This function is not available with the Windows PCL printer
driver and the Windows PCL XPS printer driver.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Click [Preferences].
4 On the [Layout] tab, click [Advanced].
5 Click [Send PostScript Error Handler]
under [PostScript Options] and select
[Yes] from the drop-down list.
6 Click [OK] until the print setup dialog
box is closed.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
Note
This function is not available with the Mac OS X 10.5 to
10.8.
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Error Handling] from the panel
menu.
4 Select [Print detailed report] at
[PostScript Errors].
5 Click [Print].
Changing Emulation Mode
You can select the emulation mode.
Memo
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, you will need an
administrator password. The default password is "aaaaaa".
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Print Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [System
Configuration Menu] and then press .
7 Make sure [Personality] is selected and
then press .
8 Press the to select an emulation mode
and then press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
-70-
5. Job Macro (for MB471/MB471w/
MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb Only)
This chapter explains the job macro function.
JOB MACRO
This section explains how to make macros for jobs that you do frequently.
You can register macros for frequently used function settings for copying, scanning, faxing, Internet
faxing, and printing in the machine and create shortcuts. This "Job Macro" allows you to perform
operations more simply and quickly.
You can create a macro for settings on the following functions:
Note
If the user authentication is enabled, log into the machine before following the procedures below.
Memo
You can register up to 16 macros.
Creating a Macro
You can create a macros for settings frequently
used.
Registering a new macro
1
Specify the settings you want to register
at the operator panel.
2 Press the <JOB MACRO> key to open
the job macro menu.
3 Press the to select a registered
number and then press .
4 Check the settings and then press .
Press the to scroll the setting list on the screen.
5 Enter a title for the new macro.
6 Select [Enter] and then press .
7 On the confirmation screen, press the
or to select [Yes] and then press .
Overwriting
1 Specify the settings you want to register
at the operator panel.
2 Press the <JOB MACRO> key to open
the job macro menu.
3 Press the to select an entry number
for a new macro and then press .
4 Press the to select [Register] and
then press .
5 Check the settings and then press .
Press the to scroll the setting list on the screen.
6 On the confirmation screen, press the
or to select [Yes] and then press .
7 Enter a title for the new macro.
8 Select [Enter] and then press .
Copying Printing from USB Memory Scanning to e-mail
Scanning to network PC Scanning to USB Memory Fax Sending
Internet Fax Sending Scanning to Fax Server
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
JOB MACRO
-71-
Job Macro (for MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
5
Using Macros
You can use macros by reading out the macros.
1 Press the <JOB MACRO> key to open
the job macro menu.
2 Press the to select the macro you
want to use and then press .
3 Select [Readout] and then press .
4 Check the settings and then press .
Press the to scroll the setting list on the screen.
5 Press the or to select [Yes] on the
confirmation message .
If the access control is enabled on the functions
you want to use, a message appears indicating
that you are not permitted to use them and the
screen returns to the confirmation message.
If fax server function is enabled, macro for fax
sending cannot be used. And if it is disabled,
macro for scanning to fax server cannot be used.
When it was changed, register new macro.
6 Start a job.
Editing the Title
You can edit the title of your macro.
1 Press the <JOB MACRO> key to open
the job macro menu.
2 Press the to select the macro whose
title you want to edit and then press .
3 Press the to select [Title Edit] and
then press .
4 Check the settings and then press .
Press the to scroll the setting list on the screen.
5 Enter a new title.
6 Select [Enter] and then press .
Deleting a Macro
You can delete macros.
1 Press the <JOB MACRO> key to open
the job macro menu.
2 Press the to select the macro you
want to delete and then press .
3 Press the to select [Delete] and then
press .
4 Check the settings and then press .
Press the to scroll the setting list on the screen.
5 Press the or to select on the
confirmation screen.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
-72-
6. Configuring at the Operator Panel
This chapter explains how to configure the equipment settings from the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
Changing the Equipment Settings
This section explains the basic procedure to change the equipment settings.
Reference
For details on the menu structure of the equipment settings, refer to "Device Setting Menu" P. 74.
Memo
An item which cannot be re-set is indicated as [---].
Admin Setup or Easy Setup
To e nte r the [Admin Setup] menu or the [Easy
Setup] menu, an administrator password is
necessary.
Memo
The default password is "aaaaaa".
1 Press the <SETTING> key to open the
equipment setting menu.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup] or
[Easy Setup] and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select the setup menu on
which you want to change a setting and
then press .
6 Change the setting and then press
For [Easy Setup], repeat step 6 until the
message indicating the setting completion is
displayed.
7 For [Admin Setup], press the until
the top screen appears.
For [Easy Setup], press the to
complete the setup.
Memo
If you want to cancel the setup of [Easy Setup], press
<RESET/LOG OUT> key.
Other Menus
1 Press the <SETTING> key to open the
equipment setting menu.
2 Press the to select the setup menu on
which you want to change a setting and
then press .
3 Change the setting and then press .
4 Press the until the top screen appears.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Checking the Current Settings
-73-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
Checking the Current Settings
This section explains the basic operational procedure for report printing. With report printing, you can
check the current settings of the machine.
Printing Reports
You can print and check the configuration or
the job logs of the machine.
Reference
For details on the reports you can print and the structure
of the [Reports] menu, refer to "Reports" P. 74.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Make sure [Reports] is selected and
then press .
If you want to print the [Menu Map], follow
procedure 4.
3 Press the to select the category to
which the report you want to print
belongs and then press .
4 Press to select the report you want to
print and then press .
If the entry screen for the admin
password, enter the admin password and
select [Enter], and then, press .
5 Press the or to select [Yes] on the
confirmation message and then press .
Note
When [Admin Setup]>[Management]>[System
Setup]>[Allow All Reports To Print] is [Disable], the
admin password is required for printing the following
reports.
-Scan To Log
- Speed Dial List
- Address Group List
- Communication Management Report (Fax)
- Communication Management Report (Email / Internet
Fax)
- Email Address List
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-74-
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
This section explains the configuration of the equipment setting menu.
Note
Factory default setting values are different according to the region where the machine is used.
Device Setting Menu
List of Each Setup Menu
Reports
Items Description Reference
Reports Prints reports. page 74
Paper Setup Performs the paper settings of trays. page 75
Address book Creates or edits an address book. page 76
Phone book Creates or edits a phone book. page 77
Profile Creates or edits a profile. page 78
Network Scan Destination Sets a destination of the network scan. page 80
Store Document Settings Performs the storing setting of scanned document data. page 80
View Information Checks the machine information. page 81
Easy Setup
Performs Easy Setup. To enter this menu, the admin password is required.
page 82
Wireless Setting MB451w/MB471w only
Performs Wireless Setting. To enter this menu, the admin password is required.
page 83
Enabling Wired
Communications
MB451w/MB471w only
This item appears when the Wireless is enable.
Performs Enabling Wired Communications. To enter this menu, the
admin password is required.
page 83
Admin Setup
Performs Admin Setup. To enter this menu, the admin password is required.
page 84
Item Description
Configuration Prints the configuration details of the machine.
System File List Prints a file list.
Demo Page Prints a demo page.
Error Log Prints an error log.
Scan To Log Prints the results of the jobs of Scan to E-mail, Scan to
Network PC, or Scan to USB Memory. Display condition:
[Admin Setup]>[Management]>[Job Log
Setup]>[Save Job Log] is set to [Enable].
MFP Usage Copies Prints the total of the job logs. Specifies the number of
pages to print in the [Copies] screen.
Network Information Prints general information on the network.
Fax Speed Dial List Prints the list of the fax numbers registered for speed dials.
Group List Prints the list of the fax numbers registered under groups.
Fax Tx/Rx Log Prints the list of the communication results of the latest
50 fax jobs received or sent. If [Admin Setup]>[Fax
Server Function]>[Environmental setting]>[Fax
Server Function] is set to [ON]. Journal Report for
Email/Internet Fax will be printed.
Fcode Box List Prints the list of Fcode boxes. Display condition: [Admin
Setup]>[Fax Server Function]>[Environmental
setting]>[Fax Server Function] is set to [OFF].
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-75-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
Paper Setup
Block Junk Fax List
Prints the address list for Block Junk Fax. Display condition:
[
Admin Setup
]>[
Fax Server Function
]>[
Environmental
setting
]>[
Fax Server Function
] is set to [
OFF
].
Email/
Internet
Fax
Journal Report Prints the results of the latest 50 Email/Internet Fax jobs.
Address Book Prints the registered address list.
Print PCL Font List Prints the list of PCL font samples.
PSE Font (MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/
MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
List Prints the list of PostScript font samples.
PPR Font List Prints a font list of IBMPPR.
FX Font List Prints a font list of EPSON FX.
Engine Status Prints a engine status.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Tray1 Paper Size A4 or Letter Selects a paper size.
Custom Width
210 mm (8.3
inch) or 8.5
inch (216 mm)
Sets width and length for a custom paper
size.
Display condition: [Custom] is selected
as a paper size.
Available range:
Width:100 to 216 mm (3.9 to 8.5 inches)
Length:148 to 356 mm (5.8 to 14.0 inches)
Length 297 mm
(11.7 inch)
or 11 inch
(279 mm)
Media Type Plain Selects a paper type.
Media Weight Medium Selects a paper weight.
Tray2
(MB461/
MB461+LP/
MB471/
MB471w/
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4161 MFP
/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Only)
Paper Size A4 or Letter Selects a paper size.
Display condition: the second tray unit is
installed.
Custom Width
210 mm (8.3
inch) or 8.5
inch (216 mm)
Sets width and length for a custom paper
size.
Display condition: [Custom] is selected
as a paper size.
Available range:
Width:148 to 216 mm (5.8 to 8.5 inches)
Length:216 to 356 mm (8.3 to 14.0 inches)
Length 297 mm
(11.7 inch)
or 11 inch
(279 mm)
Media Type Plain Selects a paper type.
Display condition: The second tray unit is
installed.
Media Weight Medium Selects a paper weight.
Display condition: The second tray unit is
installed.
MP Tray
(MB451/
MB451w/
MB471/
MB471w/
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Only)
Paper Size A4 or Letter Selects a paper size.
Custom Width
210 mm (8.3
inch) or 8.5
inch (216 mm)
Sets width and length for a custom paper
size.
Display condition: [Custom] is selected
as a paper size.
Available range:
Width:86 to 216 mm (3.4 to 8.5 inches)
Length:140 to 1321 mm (5.5 to 52.0 inches)
Length 297 mm
(11.7 inch)
or 11 inch
(279 mm)
Media Type Plain Selects a paper type.
Media Weight Medium Selects a paper weight.
Item Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-76-
Address Book
Manual
Feeder
(MB441/
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
Only)
Paper Size A4 or Letter Selects a paper size.
Custom Width
210 mm (8.3
inch) or 8.5
inch (216 mm)
Sets width and length for a custom paper
size.
Display condition: [Custom] is selected
as a paper size.
Available range:
Width:86 to 216 mm (3.4 to 8.5 inches)
Length: 140 to 1321 mm (5.5 to 52.0 inches)
Length 297 mm
(11.7 inch)
or 11 inch
(279 mm)
Media Type Plain Selects a paper type.
Media Weight Medium Select a paper weight.
Select
Tray
Fax (MB451/
MB451w/
MB471/
MB471w/
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Only)
Tray1 ON Selects a tray to use for received
documents.
Display condition: [Admin Setup]>[Fax
Server Function]>[Environmental set-
ting]>[Fax Server Function] is set to
[OFF].
Display condition for [Tray 2]: the second
tray unit is installed.
Tray2 (MB471/MB471w/
MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb Only)
ON
MP Tray OFF
Copy Tray1 ON (Prior) Specifies a tray to use when a tray is
automatically selected.
Display condition for [Tray 2]: the second
tray unit is installed.
Tray2 (MB461/MB461+LP/
MB471/MB471w/MB491/
MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4161
MFP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb Only)
ON
MP Tray (MB451/MB451w/
MB471/MB471w/MB491/
MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191
MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb Only)
OFF
Duplex Last Page Skip Blank
Page
If [Skip Blank Page] is selected, when odd
pages are printed in the double-sided print
mode, the final page is printed on only
one side. (*)
If [Always Print] is selected, both sides are
printed even for odd page job in the
double-sided print mode.
* This function may not be usable by some applications.
Item Description
E-mail Address Edit/Register Name Sets a name of a destination. Maximum16
characters.
E-mail Address Sets an e-mail address. Maximum 80
characters.
Group No. Selects a group.
Delete Deletes the registered address.
Sort By Name Sorts email addresses by name.
Sort By Number Sorts email addresses into registered
numerical order.
Search Searches for email address by entering
head of the name.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-77-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
Phone Book
E-mail Group Edit/Register Name Sets a group name. Maximum 16 characters.
Address No. Selects address numbers. Maximum 100
addresses to be registered for a group.
Delete Deletes the registered group.
Sort By Name Sorts groups by name.
Sort By Number Sorts groups into registered numerical
order.
Search Searches for email group by entering
head of the name.
Item Description
Speed Dial Edit/Register Name Sets the name of a destination. Maximum
24 characters.
Fax Number Sets a fax number. Maximum 40 digits.
Group No. Selects a group.
Delete Deletes the registered speed dial.
Sort By Name Sorts speed dials by name.
Sort By Number Sorts speed dials into registered numerical
order.
Search Searches for speed dial by entering head
of the name.
Group No. Edit/Register Name Sets a group name. Maximum 16 characters.
Speed Dial Sets a speed dial. Maximum 100
addresses to be registered for a group.
Delete Deletes the registered group.
Sort By Name Sorts groups by name.
Sort By Number Sorts groups into registered numerical order.
Search Searches for group by entering head of the
name.
Item Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-78-
Profile
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Edit/
Register
Profile Name (NULL) Sets a profile name. Maximum 16 charac-
ters.
Protocol CIFS Selects a protocol to use for storing files.
Target URL (NULL) Sets a server address and a directory to
store the scanned data. Maximum
Port No. 445 Sets a port number.
Available range: 1 to 65535.
PASV Mode OFF Sets whether to use the FTP Passive
mode.
Display condition: FTP is set as a protocol.
User Name (NULL) Sets a user name to use for logging onto
the server. Maximum 32 characters.
Password (NULL) Sets a password to use when logging.
Maximum 32 characters.
Host Kanji-Code EUC Select Chinese character code at host
side. It is displayed only when FTP is
selected by protocol.
CIFS Character Set UTF-16 Sets a character set to use in CIFS.
Display condition: CIFS is set as a proto-
col.
Encode Communication None Selects an encryption method for commu-
nication. Not available when using CIFS
protocol. Choices are different depending
on the protocol being selected.
Scan Size A4 or Letter Selects a scan size.
Image Settings Density 0 Sets the density of images.
Document Type Text/Photo Sets the image quality of documents.
Background Removal 3 Sets the default setup of the background
removal of documents.
Resolution 200 dpi Selects a resolution for scanning.
Contrast 0 Sets the contrast of documents.
Hue 0 Sets the red-green color balance.
Saturation 0 Sets the color saturation of documents.
RGB 0 Sets the RGB contrast.
File name (NULL) Sets a file name. Maximum 64 characters.
The following options can be set as the
default file name:
*1
#n: adding a serial number from 00000 to
99999
#d: adding the date of a file creation
(yymmddhhmmss)
Grayscale OFF Sets whether to scan a monochrome job
in grayscale (ON) or in black and white
(OFF).
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-79-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
Edit/
Register
File Format Color PDF Sets a file format for scanning.
Mono(Grayscale) PDF
Mono (Binary) PDF
Encrypted PDF Not Encrypt Sets whether to enable PDF encryption.
Encryption Level Medium Sets the encryption level.
Document Open Password Disable Sets a password to open an encrypted PDF. A
document open password cannot be the
same as an authority password.Maximum 32
characters.
Permissions Password Disable Sets a password to control printing or
editing on an encrypted PDF. An authority
password cannot be the same as a docu-
ment open password. Maximum 32 char-
acters.
Permission Permission To
Print
Not Allowed Sets the permission settings on encrypted
PDF.
Permission To
Extract
Not Allowed Display Condition: An authority password is
set.
Permission To
Edit
Not Allowed
Compression-
Rate
Color Low Sets a compression rate for scanning.
Mono (Grayscale) Low
Mono (Binary) High
Edge Erase Setting OFF Sets whether to erase the edge shadow
created in the surrounding of 2-page
spread documents.
Width 5 mm
(0.2 inch)
Sets an erasing width.
Available range: 5 to 50 mm (0.2 to 2.0
inches).
Delete Deletes profiles.
Sort By Name Sorts profiles by name.
Sort By Number Sorts profiles into registered numerical
order.
Search Searches for profile by entering head of
the name.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-80-
*1 In profiles, "#n" or #d" can be specified for [File Name].
When specifying "#n": 5-digit serial number between 00000 to 99999
When specifying "#d": Date and time when a file is created. 12 digits of yymmddhhmmss.
Example of file name specification (when the file format is PDF)
Note
File names registered in profiles, are applied when executing Scan To Network PC.
When performing Auto Delivery using profiles with these file names, the above names are not applied.
The file name at Auto Delivery is fixed to "yymmddhhmmss_xxxxxxxx.pdf". The part of "yymmddhhmmss" is date and time
when a file is created for the above "#d", and the part of "_xxxxxxxx" is additional 8 numeric values (meaningless value) so as
not to duplicate other files.
Network Scan Destination
Store Document Settings
yy: Year created (the last 2 digits of
the Christian Era)
hh: Hours created (00 to 23)
mm: Month created (01 to 12) mm: Minute created (00 to 59)
dd: Date created (01 to 31) ss: Second created (00 to 59)
*A date and time when a file is created are values of the timer of MB491.
When specifying "Data#n": Saved as file names such as "Data0000.pdf" and
"Data00001.pdf",etc.
When specifying "File#d": saved as file names "File090715185045.pdf", etc.
When specifying "Scan": "Scan.pdf" is created first, and then, data is saved with the name
of"Scan#d.pdf".
For "#d", refer to the above.
When nothing is specified: "Image.pdf" is created first and then, data is saved with the name of
"Image#d.pdf".
For "#d", refer to the above.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Edit/
Register
Destination (NULL) Sets a destination name. Maximum 16
characters.
Destination Address (NULL) Sets a destination address. Maximum 64
characters.
Port No. 9968 Sets a port number.
Available range: 1 to 65535.
Delete Deletes a destination.
Sort By Name Sorts destinations by name.
Sort By Number Sorts destinations into registered numeri-
cal order.
Search Searches for network scan destination by
entering head of the name.
Item Description
Store Fcode Bulletin
board
Over Write Stores documents in a bulletin box.
Delete Fcode Bulletin Board Deletes accumulated documents.
Print Fcode Box Prints accumulated document in Fcode
Confidential Box.
Received Documents Prints accumulated documents in memory.
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-81-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
View Information
Item Description
System
information
Serial No. Indicates the serial number of the machine.
Asset No. Indicates the asset number of the machine.
Lot No. Indicates the production lot number of the machine.
CU Version Indicates the version number of the control unit firmware.
PU Version Indicates the version number of the print unit firmware.
Scanner Version Indicates the version number of the scanner firmware.
Panel Version Indicates the version number of the panel firmware.
Total Memory Indicates the total capacity of all RAMs installed.
Flash Memory Indicates the total capacities of all flash memories.
SD Memory Card Indicates the size of the SD memory card and the version of the file sys-
tem. In MB441, MB451, MB451w, MB461, MB461+LP, MB471, MB471w
and ES4161 MFP, [Not Installed] is displayed.
Network IPv4 address
Indicates the IPv4 address of the machine.
Display condition: [Admin Setup]>[Network Menu]>[Network
Setup]>[TCP/IP] is set to [Enable] and [IP Version] is not set to [IPv6].
Subnet Mask
Indicates the subnet mask of the machine.
Display condition: [
Admin Setup
]>[
Network Menu
]>[
Network
Setup
]>[
TCP/IP
] is set to [
Enable
] and [
IP Version
] is not set to [
IPv6
].
Gateway Address
Indicates the gateway address of the machine.
Display condition: [
Admin Setup
]>[
Network Menu
]>[
Network
Setup
]>[
TCP/IP
] is set to [
Enable
] and [
IP Version
] is not set to [
IPv6
].
MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the machine.
NIC Program
Version
Indicates the version number of the network firmware.
IPv6 Address
(Local)
Indicates the IPv6 address of the machine.
Display condition: [
Admin Setup
]>[
Network Menu
]>[
Network
Setup
]>[
TCP/IP
] is set to [
Enable
] and [
IP Version
] is not set to [
IPv4
].
IPv6 Address
(Global)
Indicates the IPv6 address of the machine.
Display condition: [
Admin Setup
]>[
Network Menu
]>[
Network
Setup
]>[
TCP/IP
] is set to [
Enable
] and [
IP Version
] is not set to [
IPv4
].
Network
Informa-
tion (Only
displayed
for
MB451w,
MB471w.)
Network
Connection
Indicates enabled network connections (wired LAN/wireless LAN).
IPv4
Address
This menu is not indicated when [
Admin Setup
] > [
Network Menu
] >
[
Network Setup
] > [
TCP/IP
] is invalid, or if [
IP version
] is set to [
IPv6
].
Subnet
Mask
This menu is not indicated when [
Admin Setup
] > [
Network Menu
] >
[
Network Setup
] > [
TCP/IP
] is invalid, or if [
IP version
] is set to [
IPv6
].
Gateway
Address
This menu is not indicated when [
Admin Setup
] > [
Network Menu
] >
[
Network Setup
] > [
TCP/IP
] is invalid, or if [
IP version
] is set to [
IPv6
].
MAC
Address
Indicates MAC address.
NIC Pro-
gram
Version
Indicates network F/W version number.
IPv6
Address
(Local)
This menu is not indicated when [
Admin Setup
] > [
Network Menu
] >
[
Network Setup
] > [
TCP/IP
] is invalid, or if [
IP version
] is set to [
IPv4
].
IPv6
Address
(Global)
This menu is not indicated when [
Admin Setup
] > [
Network Menu
] >
[
Network Setup
] > [
TCP/IP
] is invalid, or if [
IP version
] is set to [
IPv4
].
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-82-
Easy Setup
Memo
To enter the [Easy Setup] menu, an administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
If [Admin Setup]>[Fax Server Function]>[Environmental setting]>[Fax Server Function] is set to [ON], "Fax Setting"
is not displayed.
Network Wireless
Informa-
tion
Firmware
Version
Firmware Major version
Firmware Minor version
Serial
No.
Wireless LAN Board serial number
SSID Connection destination SSID
Security Wireless LAN function security
State Wireless connection status
Band Band currently in use
Channel Channel number currently in use
RSSI Strength of received signal. Signal strength percentage
Item Description
Date/
Time
Setting
Time Zone Sets the time zone in relation to GMT.
Daylight Saving Sets daylight saving.
Server SNTP Server (Primary) Sets the SNTP server to use for setting the current date
and time. Maximum 64 characters.
SNTP Server (Secondary)
Manual Date Sets the current date and time manually.
Time
Fax
Setting
FAX Number
Sets the fax number for the machine.Maximum 20 characters.
Sender ID Sets a sender ID. Maximum 22 characters.
Network
Setting
Manual setting IP Address Sets the IP address. Maximum 15 characters. (You can
enter a value between 000.000.000.000 and
255.255.255.255)
Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask. Maximum 15 characters. (You can
enter a value between 000.000.000.000 and
255.255.255.255)
Default Gateway Sets the default gateway address. Maximum15 charac-
ters. (You can enter a value between 000.000.000.000
and 255.255.255.255)
DNS Server (Primary) Sets the IP address for a Primary DNS server. Maximum
15 characters. (You can enter a value between
000.000.000.000 and 255.255.255.255)
DNS Server (Secondary) Sets the IP address for a Secondary DNS server. Maxi-
mum 15 characters. (You can enter a value between
000.000.000.000 and 255.255.255.255)
WINS Server (Primary) Sets the name or the IP address for theWINS server.
Maximum 15 characters. (You can enter a value between
000.000.000.000 and 255.255.255.255)
WINS Server (Secondary) Sets the name or the IP address for theWINS server.
Maximum 15 characters. (You can enter a value between
000.000.000.000 and 255.255.255.255)
Auto setting Obtains an IP address automatically.
E-mail
Setting
Mail Server Address Sets the IP address or host name for the SMTP server.
Maximum 64 characters.
Set Sender's Address (from) Sets an e-mail address for the machine.
Receive Setting Sets received setting for email.
Item Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-83-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
Wireless Setting
Only the wireless LAN support model will be displayed. (MB451w/MB471w only)
Memo
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, you will need an administrator password. The default password is "aaaaaa".
E-mail
Setting
Authentication method
Sets the authentication method.
SMTP User ID Set the login name to the server used for SMTP authenti-
cation. The maximum valid number of characters is 64.
SMTP Password Set the password to the server used for SMTP authentica-
tion. The maximum valid number of characters is 64.
The default value is NULL.
POP3 Server Set the IP address or server name for the POP3 server.
This is required for "POP before SMTP" authentication.
The default value is NULL.
POP User ID Set the login name for the server used for POP authenti-
cation or E-mail To Print (printing received E-mail). The
maximum valid number of characters is 64.
When POP before SMTP authentication is used, it is nec-
essary to set the character string after the "@" from the
E-mail address set as the sender's (From) E-mail
address. The default value is NULL.
POP Password
Set the password for the server used for POP authentication
or E-mail To Print (printing received E-mail). The maximum
valid number of characters is 16. The default value is NULL.
ITEM OPTION OPTION/DESCRIPTION
Wireless
Setting
Automatic Setup (WPS)
WPS-PBC WPS-PBC is executed.
WPS-PIN WPS-PIN is executed.
Wireless
Network
Selection
A list of access point name
found in the search.
Manual Setup SSID Input SSID.
Security The security of the wireless LAN function.
WPA-EAP can set only in Web.
WEP Key Input WEP Key.
This item appears when the [WEP] is selected in the
[Security].
WPA
Encryption
Type
WPA-PSK coding method
This item appears when the [WPA] or [WPA2] is selected
in the [Security].
WPA
Pre-shared
Key
Input Pre Shared Key.
This item appears when the [WPA] or [WPA2] is selected
in the [Security].
Wireless
reconnection
Wireless reconnection is executed.
Enabling Wired Communications This item appears when the Wireless is enable.
Item Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-84-
Admin Setup
In the following menu, you can change the settings that need the administrator authority.
Memo
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, you will need an administrator password. The default password is "aaaaaa".
If you change the default setting from the [Admin Setup] menu, and want to reflect the changed default on the start screen
immediately, press <RESET/LOG OUT> key or press the function switch key which is any of <Copy>, <Scan>, <Print> and
<FAX/HOOK>.
Copy Setup
"Copy Setup" "Fax Setup" "Internet Fax Setup"
"Scanner Setup" "Print From USB Memory Setup" "Print Setup"
"Network Menu" "Management" "User Install"
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Default
Settings
Scan Size A4 or Letter Sets the default scan size.
Duplex Copy
OFF (Do not
do both sides)
Sets the duplex (2-sided) function off or
on.
Zoom 100% Sets the default zoom ratio.
Sort ON Sets whether to collate copied documents
by default.
Image Settings Density 0 Sets the default density of images.
Document Type Text/Photo Sets the default print quality when scan-
ning documents.
Resolution Normal Sets the default setting of resolution.
Background Removal 3
Sets the default setup of the background removal.
Contrast 0 Sets the default setting of contrast.
Direction Portrait Selects the default page orientation of
documents.
ID Card Copy OFF Sets whether to use the ID card copy
mode by default.
Continuous Scan OFF
Sets whether to use the continuous scan mode.
Mixed Size OFF Sets whether different sized documents
are copied on each size paper as the
default.
Margin Margin OFF Sets the default settings of margins.
Margin Front Left 0 Available rage: 0 to ± 25 mm
(0.0 to 1.0inches) (1 mm/ increment)
Top
Back Left
Top
Edge Erase Setting ON Sets whether to erase the shade created
in the surrounding of 2-page spread docu-
ments as the default.
Width 2 mm
(0.1 inch)
Sets an erasing width.
Available range:2 to 50 mm
(0.1 to 2.0 inches).
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-85-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
Fax Setup
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Default
Settings
Resolution Normal Sets the default setting of image quality.
Density 0 Sets the default density of images.
Scan Size A4 or Letter Sets the default scan size.
Continuous Scan OFF Sets whether to use the Continuous Scan
mode.
TTI ON Sets whether to add the sender's name to
the header of the transmitted fax.
Transmit Confirmation Report ON or OFF Sets whether to print the result of the
transmission automatically.
Memory Tx ON Sets whether to use memory transmission
(ON) or real-time transmission (OFF).
Fcode
Box
Edit/Register Confidential
Box
Box Name (NULL) Sets the name of confidential boxes. Maxi-
mum 16 characters.
Sub-Address (NULL) Sets the sub-address for your confidential
box. Maximum 20 characters.
Hold Time 0 Sets the hold time for your confidential
box. Available range: 00 to 31 days.
I.D.Code (NULL) Sets the password for your confidential
document box. Four characters from 0 to
9 (numbers only).
Bulletin Box Box Name (NULL) Sets a bulletin box name. Maximum 16
characters.
Sub-Address (NULL) Sets a sub-address for your bulletin box.
Maximum 20 characters.
Delete Deletes an Fcode box.
Security
Function
ID Check Tx OFF Sets whether to use the ID check trans-
mission.
Broadcast Destination ON Sets whether to indicate the destination
number before starting broadcast trans-
mission.
Confirm Dial OFF Sets whether to reenter the destination
fax number before sending a fax.
Secure Receive Setting OFF Sets whether to use the secure receive
function.
Password (NULL) Sets password for printing received docu-
ments in memory.
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-86-
Other
Settings
Redial Tries 2 times Sets the number of redial attempts.
Available range: 0 to 9 times.
Redial Interval 1 minute Sets the time between redial attempts.
Available range: 1 to 5 minutes.
Block Junk Fax Setting OFF Sets the mode of Block Junk Fax.
Registered
List
Register/Edit (No Entry)
Register/Edit addresses for Block Junk Fax.
Display condition: [
Admin Setup
]>[
Other
Settings
]>[
Block Junk Fax
]>[
Setting
] is
set to [
Mode2
].
Delete
(Nothing: con-
nect Item cell
and Factory
default cell)
Delete addresses for Block Junk Fax. Dis-
play condition: [Admin Setup]>[Other
Settings]>[Block Junk Fax]>[Setting] is
set to [Mode2].
Ring Response 1 ring Sets the number of rings required before
receiving an incoming fax.
Dialling Pause Duration 2 seconds Sets the dial pause time.
Available range: 0 to 10 seconds.
Rx Reduc. Rate Auto Sets the reception reduction rate.
Reduc. Margin 24 mm or 3.9
inch
Sets the threshold level of reception
reduction.
Available range: 0 to 100 mm
(0 to 3.9 inches).
ECM Mode ON Sets whether to use the error correction
mode.
PreFix NULL Sets the dialing prefix. Maximum 40 dig-
its.
Received Time Stamp OFF Sets whether the time stamp is printed on
incoming faxes.
Print Check Message ON Sets whether the error content is reported
when a transmission error occurs.
Fax
Setting
Service Bit OFF If set OFF, some menu items are not dis-
played on the panel.
Country Code International
or U.S.A or
Australia(Sin-
gapore)
Sets the country code.
A/R Full Print ON Sets whether to print the list of the com-
munication results automatically after
every 50 communications.
Tone For Echo (For Transmission) Disable It only shows, when ServiceBit = ON.
Tone For Echo (For Reception) Disable It only shows, when ServiceBit = ON.
H/Modem Rate(For Tx) 33.6 Kbps Sets the default value of the modem
transmission speed while the machine is
sending a fax.
H/Modem Rate(For Rx) 33.6 Kbps Sets the default value of the modem
transmission speed while the machine is
receiving a fax.
Attenuator
10 dB, Range :
0-15 dB
Enter Attenuator.It only shows, when Ser-
vice Bit = ON.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-87-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
Fax
Setting
MF Attenuator 8 dB, Range :
0-15 dB
Enter MF(Tone) Attenuator.It only shows,
when Service Bit = ON.
Pulse Make Ratio
40 %, Range :
33, 39, 40%
Sets the make rate of DP (10 pps) during
call.It only shows, when Servic Bit = ON
and Tone/Pulse setting = PULSE.
Pulse Dial Type N, Range : N,
10-N, N+1
Sets the pulse type for dialing. It only
shows, when Servic Bit = ON
and Tone/Pulse setting = PULSE.
MF(Tone) Duration
100 mseconds,
Range : 75,
85, 100
mseconds
Enter MF(Tone) Duration.It only shows,
when Service Bit = ON and Tone/Pulse
setting = TONE.
Calling Timer 60 seconds,
Range : 1-
255 seconds
It only shows, when Service Bit = ON.
PBX Line OFF When connecting to PBX (internal
exchange), put it to [ON].
Forwarding
Setting
Forwarding Setting OFF Sets whether to enable or not the fax for-
warding mode.
Forwarding Number (NULL) Sets a fax number used for the fax for-
warding mode.
TAD Mode Type 3 Sets an action type at the answering
machine/ fax standby mode.
[Type 3]: A fax signal is detected in 15
seconds from answering by the answering
machine.
[Type 1]: A fax signal is detected right
after the answering machine answers and
reception is performed. By setting to this
type, if there is anything wrong with fax
reception, it may be improved.
[Type 2]: A fax signal is detected right
after the answering machine answers. Set
to this type if you use as a phone mostly.
Tel Priority Mode OFF Sets a timing of phone rings for extension
phone and this machine at the phone/ fax
standby mode.
[ON]: assumes that the party is making a
phone call.
Phone rings are made early.
[OFF] assumes that the part is sending a
fax. If it is judged that the party is not
sending a fax, phone rings are made.
CNG Detection OFF Sets whether to judge that the party is
sending a fax during the off the hook con-
dition at the phone / Fax standby mode.
T/F Timer Programming 35 seconds Sets a time to start the auto reception of
fax when not answering the phone after
incoming calls at the phone / fax standby
mode or answering machine / fax standby
mode.
Soft Ringer Volume Middle Sets a phone ring volume at the phone /
fax standby mode.
Remote Receive Number OFF Sets a remote switch number.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-88-
Fax Server Function
Internet Fax Setup
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Environ-
mental
setting
Fax Server Function OFF
Sets whether to use scanning to fax server.
Prefix (NULL)
Sets to prefix code for scanning to fax server.
Suffix @faxserver Sets to suffix code for scanning to fax
server.
Text OFF Sets whether to add body text
Default
Settings
Scan Size A4 or Letter Sets the default scan size.
Density 0 Sets the default density of images.
Resolution Normal Sets the default setting of resolution.
Background Removal 3 Sets the default setup of the background
removal.
Continuous Scan OFF Sets whether to use the Continuous Scan
mode by default.
Compression Rate Low Selects the default compression level.
Security
Function
Broadcast Destination ON
Sets whether to indicate the destination
number before starting broadcast trans-
mission.
Confirm Dial OFF Sets whether to reenter the destination
fax number before sending.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Default
Settings
Scan Size A4 or Letter Sets the default scan size.
Density 0 Sets the default density of images.
Resolution Normal Sets the default setting of resolution.
Background Removal 3 Sets the default setup of the background
removal.
Continuous Scan OFF Sets whether to use the Continuous Scan
mode by default.
Compression Rate Low Selects the default compression level.
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-89-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
Scanner Setup
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Default
Settings
Scan Size A4 or Letter Sets the default scan size.
Image Settings Density 0 Sets the default density of images.
Document Type Text/Photo Sets the image quality of the documents.
Background Removal 3 Sets the default setup of the background
removal.
Resolution 200 dpi Sets the default resolution setting.
Contrast 0 Sets the default contrast setting.
Hue 0 Sets the default red-green color balance.
Saturation 0 Sets the default saturation setting.
RGB 0 Sets the default RGB contrast.
Continuous Scan OFF Sets whether to use the Continuous Scan
mode by default.
Grayscale OFF Sets whether to scan a monochrome job
in grayscale or in black and white.
File Format Color PDF Selects the default file format. [Color] /
[Mono (Grayscale)] can be selected
from PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS. [Mono
(Binary)] can be selected from PDF, TIFF,
and XPS.
Mono (Grayscale) PDF
Mono (Binary) PDF
Encrypted PDF
Setting
Document Open Password (NULL) Sets the default password to open an
encrypted PDF.
The same password with the authentica-
tion password cannot be used. Maximum
32 characters.
Permissions Password (NULL) Sets a default password to control printing
or editing on an encrypted PDF. The same
password with the Document open pass-
word cannot be used. Maximum 32
characters.
Display Default Password Disable Sets whether the registered password is
displayed or not displayed on the pass-
word selection screen for the document
open password or authentication pass-
word.
[Disable]: Displays the registered default
password using * instead of each charac-
ter.
[Enable]: Displays the registered default
password as it is.
Compression
Rate
Color Low Selects a default compression level.
Mono (Grayscale) Low
Mono (Binary) High
Edge Erase Setting OFF Sets whether to erase the edge shadow
created in the surrounding of 2-page
spread document.
Width 5 mm
(0.2 inch)
Sets an erasing width. Available range: 5
to 50 mm (0.2 to 2.0 inches).
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-90-
E-mail
Setup
File Name (NULL) Sets a file name of scanned images. Maxi-
mum 64 characters.
The following options can be set as the
default file name
*1
:
#n: adding a serial number from 00000 to
99999
#d: adding the date of a file creation
(yymmddhhmmss)
Template Edit Subject (NULL) Registers or edits standard e-mail subject
text. Maximum 80 characters.
Edit Body (NULL) Registers or edits standard e-mail body
text. Maximum 256 characters.
From / Reply
To
From (NULL)
Sets the e-mail address which is given to the
[
From
] column. Maximum 80 characters.
E-mail Sender ID (NULL)
Sets the sender name which is given to the
[
From
] column. Maximum 32 characters.
Reply to (NULL)
Sets the e-mail address which is given to the
[
Reply to
] column. Maximum 80 characters.
Broadcast Destination ON Sets whether an e-mail address confirma-
tion screen is displayed before sending the
e-mail.
MDN Response OFF Sets whether to request the MDN (mes-
sage disposition notification) response.
A/R Full Print OFF Sets whether to print the transmission and
reception history reports automatically.
MCF Report OFF Sets whether to print a fax confirmation
after transmission.
Timeout of MCF Report 15 minutes Sets the timeout for printing a fax confir-
mation after transmission. If the setting
period of time is exceeded, the report is
automatically printed without the MDN
response.
Print Check Message OFF Sets whether the error content is reported
when a transmission error occurs.
USB
Memory
Setup
File Name (NULL) Sets the default setup for file names. Max-
imum 64 characters The following options
can be set as the default file name
*1
:
#n: adding a serial number from 00000 to
99999
#d: adding the date of a file creation
(yymmddhhmmss).
TWAIN
Setup
Network TWAIN ON Sets whether to use the Network TWAIN.
Port No.
*2
9967 Sets the port number. Available range: 1
to 65535.
Timeout Setting 5 minutes Sets the timeout duration.
Available range: 1 to 30 minutes.
WSD
Scan
Setup
WSD Scan Enable Sets whether to use WSD Scan.
Binding
Long Edge Bind
Sets the default binding position.
PC Scan
Mode
Simple Scan Mode Selects the default PC scan mode.
Scanner
Calibration
Execute Starts a scanner calibration.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-91-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
*1 "#n" or "#d" can be specified for [File Name].
When specifying "#n": 5-digit serial number between 00000 to 99999
When specifying "#d": Date and time when a file is created. 12 digits of yymmddhhmmss.
Example of file name specification (when the file format is PDF)
*2 To enable the changed setting, the network card must be restarted. Follow the instructions on
the confirmation screen displayed when changing the settings, and restart the network card.
Print From USB Memory Setup
Print Setup
yy: Year created (the last 2 digits of
the Christian Era)
hh: Hours created (00 to 23)
mm: Month created (01 to 12) mm: Minute created (00 to 59)
dd: Date created (01 to 31) ss: Second created (00 to 59)
*A date and time when a file is created are values of the timer of MB491.
When specifying "Data#n": Saved as file names such as "Data0000.pdf" and "Data00001.pdf",
etc.
When specifying "File#d": saved as file names "File090715185045.pdf", etc.
When specifying "Scan": "Scan.pdf" is created first, and then, data is saved with the name of
"Scan#d.pdf".For "#d", refer to the above.
When nothing is specified: "Image.pdf" is created first and then, data is saved with the name of
"Image#d.pdf". For "#d", refer to the above.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Default
Settings
Paper Feed Tray 1 Sets the default feed tray.
Copies 1 Sets the number of copies.
Duplex OFF Sets whether to use the duplex function
by default.
Binding Long edge
bind
Sets the default binding position for
duplex printing.
Fit ON Sets whether to scale the page size of
documents to fit the paper size.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Print
Menu
Tray Configura-
tion
Paper Feed Tray 1 Selects the default feed tray.
Auto Tray Switch ON Sets whether to enable the automatic tray
switch function.
Tray Sequence Down Sets the selection order priority for auto-
matic tray selection and automatic tray
switching.
MP Tray Usage
(MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb
Only)
Do Not Use [When Mismatching]: If a paper size or
type in a tray is not matched to that of the
print data, uses paper from the MP tray
instead of the specified tray.
[Do Not Use]: makes the MP tray
unavailable in auto tray selection or
switching.
Media Check Enable Sets whether to check the un-matching
between the paper size and the page size
of documents.
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-92-
Print
Menu
Print Setup Copies 1 Sets the number of copies of a document
to be printed. For local printing, this set-
ting is invalid except for demo data. Avail-
able range: 1 to 999.
Duplex OFF Sets whether to use the duplex function
by default.
Binding Long edge
bind
Sets the default binding position for
duplex printing.
Resolution 600dpi Sets the resolution.
Toner Save Mode OFF Sets whether to use the toner save mode.
Orientation Portrait Selects the page orientation.
Lines Per Page 60 or 64 lines Sets the number of lines of text per page (for
PCL only). The default number of lines for A4
portrait is 64. The default number of lines for
Letter portrait is 60. The number differs
depending on the size of paper on the feed
tray.
Edit Size Cassette size Sets the size of the printable page area to
match the size of the paper when there is
no specification by the command of paper
edit size specification from the computer.
It is unavailable in PS.
Width
210 mm (8.3
inch) or 8.5
inch (216 mm)
Sets the default width of the custom size
paper. Available range: 86 to 216 mm (3.4
to 8.5 inches).
Length 297 mm
(11.7 inch)
or 11 inch
(279 mm)
Selects the default length of the custom
size paper. Available range: 140 to 1321
mm (5.5 to 52.0 inches).
Printer Adjust Manual Timeout 60 seconds Sets how many seconds the machine will wait
for paper to be fed before cancelling a job.
Wait Timeout 40 seconds Sets how many seconds the machine will
wait when received data pauses before
forcing a page eject. A PS job is canceled
if timeout occurs.
Timeout Local 40 seconds Sets the time of open of each port after
end of job. (The network is excluded.)
Timeout Net 90 seconds Sets the time of open of Network port
after end of job.
Jam Recovery Enable Sets whether the machine will attempt to
re-print any pages lost due to a paper jam
once the jam has been cleared.
Paper Black Setting 0 Sets values to make a fine adjustment to
very visible faded print results or light
specks (or streaks) results in plain paper
black setting.
Darkness 0 Sets print darkness.
SMR Setting 0 Corrects variations in print results caused
by temperature and humidity conditions
and differences in print density and fre-
quency. Change the setting if the print
quality is uneven.
BG Setting 0 Corrects variations in print results caused
by temperature and humidity conditions
and difference in print density and fre-
quency. Change the setting if the back-
ground is dark.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-93-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
Print
Menu
Print Position
Adjust
Front X Adjust 0.00 mm Adjusts the position of the whole printing
image perpendicular to the direction of
paper movement. Available range: ±2.00
mm (0.25 increments).
Front Y Adjust 0.00 mm Adjusts the position of the whole printing
image parallel to the direction of paper
movement. Available range: ±2.00 mm
(0.25 increments).
Back X Adjust 0.00 mm Adjusts the position of the image on the
reverse side of a duplex print perpendicu-
lar to the direction of paper movement.
Available range:
±2.00 mm (0.25 incre-
ments).
Back Y Adjust 0.00 mm Adjusts the position of the image on the
reverse size of a duplex print parallel to
the direction of paper movement. Avail-
able range:
±2.00 mm (0.25 increments).
Drum Cleaning OFF Sets whether to do cleaning of a drum
before printing. It may have an effect for
improvement of image quality.
Hex Dump OFF Prints out the data received from the host
computer in hexidecimal code. To finish
printing, turn off the power.
System
Configu-
ration
Menu
Personality Auto Emula-
tion
Selects the emulation mode. When set to
auto, the correct emulation is automatically
selected each time a print job is received.
Alarm Release Manual When [Manual] is selected, non-critical
warnings, such as requests for a different
paper size, can be cleared by pressing the
<RESET/LOG OUT> key. When [Auto] is
selected, they are cleared when the print
job resumes.
Auto Continue OFF Sets whether the machine automatically
recovers from a memory overflow.
Error Report OFF Sets whether to print error details when
PostScript errors occur.
PCL
Setup
Font Source Resident Selects the location of the font to use.
Font No. I0 Selects the number of the font to use.
Available range: I0 to I90 when [Resi-
dent] is set.
Font Pitch 10.00 CPI Sets the width of the PCL default font.
Available range: 0.44 to 99.99 CPI
(0.01CPI increments).
Font Height 12.00 point Sets the height of the PCL default font.
Available range: 4.00 to 999.75 point.
(0.25 point increments)
Symbol Set PC-8 Selects a PCL symbol set.
A4 Print Width 78 Column Sets a number of digits for automatic line
feed on A4 paper.
White Page Skip OFF Selects whether to print blank pages.
CR Function CR Sets the machine operation when receiv-
ing CR code.
LF Function LF Sets the machine operation when
receiving LF code.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-94-
PCL
Setup
Print Margin Normal Sets the area of the page that is
nonprintable.
Pen Width Adjust ON Sets whether the thinnest line width is
emphasized to look wider.
Tray ID# Tray1 1 Sets a number to tray 1, 2, MP tray
(MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/
MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only) , and
Manual Feeder (MB441/MB461/
MB461+LP/ES4161 MFP Only) for the
paper feed destination command inPCL
emulation.
Available range: 1 to 59. Display condition
for [Tray 2]: the second tray unit is
installed.
Tray2 (MB461/MB461+LP/
MB471/MB471w/MB491/
MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4161
MFP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb
Only)
5
MP Tray (MB451/MB451w/
MB471/MB471w/MB491/
MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191
MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb Only)
4
Manual Feeder (MB441/
MB461/MB461+LP
/
ES4161
MFP Only)
2
PS Setup
(MB451/
MB451w/
MB471/
MB471w/
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Only)
L1 Tray TYPE 1 Sets a type of tray numbering in Post-
Script print job.
When [TYPE1] is selected: the tray num-
bering starts from 0.
When [TYPE2] is selected: the tray num-
bering starts from 1.
SIDM
Setup
SIDM Manual ID# 2
Sets a number to SIDM Manual, MP and
Tray ID.
SIDM Manual2 ID# 3
SIDM MP Tray ID# 4
SIDM Tray1 ID# 1
SIDM Tray2 ID# (MB461/MB461+LP/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4161
MFP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb
Only)
5
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-95-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
IBM PPR
Setup
Character Pitch 10 CPI
Specifies character pitch in IBM PPR emulation.
Font Condense
12CPI to 20CPI
Specifies 12CPI pitch for Condense Mode.
Character Set SET-2 Specifies a character set.
Symbol Set IBM-437 Specifies a symbol set.
Letter O Style Disable Specifies the style that replaces 9BH with
letter o and 9DH with a zero.
Zero Character Normal Sets the zero to be slashed or unslashed.
Line Pitch 6LPI Specifies the line spacing.
White Page Skip OFF Selects whether blank pages are printed
or not.
CR Function CR Selects whether a received carriage return
character (0Dh) also causes a line feed.
LF Function LF Selects whether a received line feed char-
acter (0Ah) also causes a carriage return.
Line Length 80 Column
Specifies the number of characters per line.
Form Length
11 or 11.7 inch
Specifies the length of paper.
TOF Position 0.0inch Specifies the distance of print from the top
edge of the paper.
Left Margin 0.0inch Specifies the distance of print from the left
hand edge of the paper.
Fit to Letter Disable Sets the printing mode that can fit print
data, equivalent to 11 inches (66 lines), in
the LETTER-size printable area.
Text Height Same Sets the height of a character.
SAME: Regardless of CPI, same height
DIFF: As CPI, character heights vary.
EPSON
FX Setup
Character Pitch 10CPI Specifies character pitch in this emulation.
Character Set SET-2 Specifies a character set.
Symbol Set IBM-437 Specifies a symbol set.
Letter O Style Disable Specifies the style that replaces 9BH with
letter o and 9DH with a zero.
Zero Character Normal Sets the zero to be slashed or unslashed.
Line Pitch 6LPI Specifies the line spacing.
White Page Skip OFF Selects whether blank pages are printed
or not.
CR Function CR Selects whether a received carriage return
character (0Dh) also causes a line feed.
Line Length 80 Column Specifies the number of characters per
line.
Form Length 11 or 11.7
inch
Specifies the length of paper.
TOF Position 0.0 inch Specifies the distance of print from the top
edge of the paper.
Left Margin 0.0 inch Specifies the distance of print from the left
hand edge of the paper.
Fit to Letter Disable Sets the printing mode that can fit print
data, equivalent to 11 inches (66 lines), in
the LETTER-size printable area.
Text Height Same Sets the height of a character.
SAME: Regardless of CPI, same height
DIFF: As CPI, character heights vary.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-96-
Network Menu
Memo
To enable the settings changed in the [Network Control] menu, the network card must be restarted. Follow the instructions on
the confirmation screen displayed when changing the settings, and restart the network card.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Network
Setting
TCP/IP Enable Sets whether to enable TCP/IP.
IP Version IPv4 Selects the IP version.
IPv6 can be selected only by Telnet.
When IPv6 is selected by Telnet, the
screen before selecting items, [IPv6] is
displayed, and on the screen after select-
ing items, nothing is selected.
Display condition:TCP/IP protocol is
enabled.
NetBEUI Disable Sets whether to enable NetBEUI.
NetBIOS over TCP Enable Sets whether to enable NetBIOS over
TCP.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
NetWare Disable Sets whether to enable NetWare.
EtherTalk (MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/
MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
Disable Sets whether to enable EtherTalk.
Frame Type Auto Selects a frame type.
Display condition:Netware is enabled.
IP Address Set Auto Sets the method of setting up IP address.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
IPv4 Address 192.168.
100.100
Sets an IP address.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
Subnet Mask 255.255.
255.0.
Sets a subnet mask.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
Gateway Address 0.0.0.0 Sets a gateway address.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
DNS Server (Primary) 0.0.0.0 Sets an IP address for primary DNS
server. Display condition: TCP/IP protocol
is enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
DNS Server (Secondary) 0.0.0.0 Sets an IP address for secondary DNS
server. Display condition: TCP/IP protocol
is enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
WINS Server (Primary) 0.0.0.0 Sets a name or an IP address for the
WINS server.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-97-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
Network
Setting
WINS Server (Secondary) 0.0.0.0 Sets a name or an IP address for the
WINS server.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
Web Enable Sets whether to enable access from a
web browser.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled.
Telnet Disable Sets whether to enable access from the
Telnet.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled.
FTP Disable Sets whether to enable access from FTP.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled.
IPSec Disable This item is displayed and it can be dis-
abled only when IPSec is set to valid.
SNMP Enable Sets whether to enable access from
SNMP.
Display condition: Netware is enabled
and TCP/IP is enabled.
Network Scale Normal When [Normal] is set: the machine
works effectively even when connected to
a HUB that has a spanning tree feature.
However, printer start up time gets lon-
ger when computers are connected to
two or three small LANs.
When [
Small
] is set: computers can cover
from two or three small LANs to a largeLAN,
but it may not work effectively when it is con-
nected to a HUB with a spanning tree feature.
HUB Link Setting Auto
Negoti-
ate
Sets the hub linking method. Usually,
select [Auto Negotiate].
TCP ACK Type1 Sets a type of TCP Acknowledgment.
When Type1 is set, the printer replies to
every packet.
When Type2 is set, the printer replies to
plural packets in a mass.
When printing comes to take time by the
setting of the hub, choosing Type2 may
improve the matter.
Usually, setting Type1 hasn't any problem.
Network PS-Protocol (MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191
MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
RAW Sets a PS-protocol.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-98-
Network
Setting
Wireless
Setting
Automatic Setup
(WPS)
WPS-PBC - WPS-PBC is executed.
WPS-PIN - WPS-PIN is executed.
Wireless
Network
Selection
A list of access point name found
in the search.
Manual
Setup
SSID (NULL) Input SSID
Security Disable The security of the wireless LAN function
WPA-EAP can set only in Web.
WEP Key (NULL) Input WEP Key
This item is displayed when WEP was
selected in the Security item.
WPA
Encryption
Type
TKIP WPA-PSK coding method
This item is displayed when WPA or WPA2
was selected in the Security item.
WPA
Pre-shared
Key
(NULL) Input Pre Shared Key
This item is displayed when WPA or WPA2
was selected in the Security item.
Wireless
reconnec-
tion
- Wireless reconnection is executed.
Enabling Wired
Communications
- Wired environment is validated.
This item is displayed when Wireless LAN
is effective.
Factory
Defaults
Execute
The settings of the network, mail server, LDAP
server, and secure protocol server are
returned to the default settings.
Mail
Server
Setup
SMTP Server (NULL) Sets the IP address or host name for the
SMTP server.
SMTP Port 25
Sets the port number. Usually, the default is used.
Available range: 1 to 65535
SMTP Encryption None Selects an encryption method in the
SMTP communication.
Receive Setting Disable Select a protocol to use for the E-mail
reception.
POP3 Server (NULL) Sets the IP address or host name for the
POP3 server.
POP3 Port 110 Sets the port number prepared by the
POP3 on the POP3 server.
Available range: 1 to 65535.
Mail
Server
Setup
POP Encryption None Selects an encryption method or e-mail
transmission.
Authentication Method None Sets the certification for e-mail transmis-
sion.
SMTP User ID (NULL) Sets a log-in name used for SMTP certifi-
cation.
SMTP Password (NULL) Sets a log-in password used for SMTP
certification.
POP User ID (NULL) Sets a log-in name onto the server used
for POP certification or for printing
attached files of received e-mails.
POP Password (NULL) Sets a lo-in password onto the server
used for POP certification or for printing
attached files of received e-mails.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
-99-
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
LDAP
Server
Setting
Server Setting LDAP Server (NULL) Sets an IP address or host name for the
LDAP server.
Port No. 389 Sets a port number.
Available range: 1 to 65535.
LDAP
Server
Setting
Timeout 30
seconds
Sets the timeout value for the search
response from the LDAP server.
Available range: 10 to 120 seconds.
Max. Entries 100 Sets the maximum number of search
results from the LDAP server.
Search Root (NULL) Specifies a position to start searching the
LDAP directory.
Attribute Name1 cn Specifies an attribute used for searching.
Name2 sn
Name3 given-
Name
E-mail Address mail
Additional Filter (NULL)
Authentication Method Anony-
mous
Sets the certification method.
For Digest-MD5, the DNS server must be
set. For Secure Protocol, the secure pro-
tocol server must be set.
User ID (NULL) Sets a user ID for certification of the
LDAP server. Maximum 80 characters.
Display condition: the authentication
method for LDAP is not set to [Anony-
mous].
Password (NULL) Sets a certification password for the
LDAP server. Maximum 32 characters.
Display condition: the authentication
method for LDAP is not set to [Anony-
mous].
Encryption None Sets the encryption of communication
with the LDAP server.
Secure
Protocol
Server
Setting
Domain (NULL) Sets a realm name for the Kelberos certi-
fication.
Maximum 64 characters.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
- 100 -
Management
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Default Mode Copy Sets the default mode of the machine.
Opera-
tion
Clear
Operation Timeout 3 Sets time of automatic reset. Available
range: 1 to 10 minutes.
Clear After Job OFF Sets whether to reset after any job is
completed.
Sound
Control
Key Touch Tone Volume Middle Sets the volume of the key-touch tone.
FAX Buzzer Volume Middle Sets the volume for transmission complete
acknowledgment.
Local-
Inter-
face
*1
USB Menu Soft Reset Disable Sets whether to enable the soft reset
command.
Speed 480 Mbps Selects the maximum transfer speed of
USB interface.
USB PS-Protocol RAW Selects a USB PS-protocol.
Offline Receive Disable Sets whether to receive data in offline
state or in recoverable error state.
Serial Number Enable Sets whether to use a USB serial number.
System
Setup
Access Control Disable Sets access control.
User Authentication Method Local Display condition: [Access Control] is set
to [User] or [Password].
Unit of Measure millimeter Selects a displayed unit (millimeter / inch)
of measure.
Date Format dd/mm/yyyy
Allow All Reports To Print Disable Sets whether to allow printing reports with
personal information.
Near Life LED Enable Sets whether to light an LED when a near
life warning occurs.
Near Life Status Enable Sets whether a message is displayed when
a near life warning occurs.
Address Information Lock Time Out 3 minutes Sets time until a lock is released by the
machine when address book, telephone
book, or profile is kept locked by the utili-
ties. Available range: 1 to 10 minutes.
USB Memory Interface Enable When [Disable] is set. the scan to USB
and the print from USB memory functions
cannot be used.
Panel Contrast 0 Sets the LCD panel contrast. Available
range:
±10 (1 increments).
Power
Save
Power Save Time 1 minute Sets time to enter the power save mode.
Sleep Time 30 minutes Sets time to enter the sleep mode.
Auto Power Off Time 4 hours Sets time interval to turn off the
machine's power automatically.
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
- 101 -
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
Power
Save
Silent Mode ON (MB451/
MB451w/
MB471/
MB471w/
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb)
OFF (MB441/
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161MFP)
Sets whether to enable the silent mode.
ECO Mode
*1
OFF When [ON] is set: the machine starts a
small print job before the temperature of
the fixing device reaches the regulation
degree.
When [OFF] is set: the machine starts a
print job after the temperature of the fix-
ing device reaches the regulation degree.
Memory
Setup
Receive Buffer Size Auto Sets the reception buffer size that local
interface secures.
Resource Save OFF Sets the resource save area.
Flash
Memory
Setup
*1
Initialize Execute Initializes flash memory.Display condi-
tion:[Limit for Initialization] is set to
[Disable].
SD Mem-
ory Card
Setup
*1
Initialize Execute Initializes an SD memory card. This item
is displayed in MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191
MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb only.
Display condition: [Limit for Initializa-
tion] is set to [Disable].
Format
Partition
PCL Formats a partition in an SD memory
card.This item is displayed in MB491/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb only.
Display condition: [Limit for Initializa-
tion] is set to [Disable].
Common
PS (MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
Storage
Mainte-
nance
Setup
Check File
System
Execute Resolves the un-match between the actual
free space and displayed free space of file
system and recovers the control data.
Erase SD Mem-
ory Card
Execute Deletes the data in an SD memory card.
This item is displayed in MB491/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb only.
Initial Lock Enable Sets whether to give permission to the
setup change accompanied by initializa-
tion of flash memory or an SD memory
card.
Encryp-
tion
Setup
Job Limitation Disable When [Encrypted Job only] is selected,
all requests for print except encrypted
authentication printing are ignored. This
item is displayed in MB491/MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb
only.
Language
Maint
Setup
Initialize
*1
Execute Deletes downloaded message files.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
- 102 -
*1 A message appears confirming you that making changes automatically restarts the system.
Select [Yes] to continue. Select [No] to cancel.
*2 A message appears confirming you that execution automatically restarts the system. Select
[Yes] to continue. Select [No] to cancel.
*3 A message appears confirming you that execution deleted all job logs. Select [Yes] to con-
tinue. Select [No] to cancel.
User Install
Admin Password aaaaaa Changes an administrator password. 6 to
12 characters are available.
Reset Settings
*2
Execute Deletes job macros, fax send/receive
data, and the history information and
returns the settings to the default.
Job Log
Setup
Save Job Log
*1
Disable Sets whether to save job logs.
Clear Job Log*3
Execute Clears the saved job logs. Display condi-
tion:[Save Job Log] is set to [Enable].
Print
Statistics
Supplies Report Disable Sets whether to print the consumable
counters' report.
Reset Main
Counter
Execute Resets the main counter.
Reset Supplies
Counter
Execute Resets the consumable counter.
Display conditions: Setting [Consumable
Counter] to [Active].
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Time Zone 0:00 Sets your time zone in relation to GMT.
Available range: -12:00 to + 13:00. (15
minutes / increment)
Set Daylight Saving ON Sets whether to enable the Daylight
Saving mode.
Time
Setup
Auto Setup SNTP Server (Primary) Manual Setup Sets the SNTP server to use for setting the
current date and time. Maximum 64
characters.
SNTP Server (Secondary)
Manual Setup Sets the current date and time manually.
Power
Save
Power Save Enable ON Sets whether to enable the power save
mode.
Sleep ON Sets whether to enable the sleep mode.
Auto Power Off Auto Config
or Disable
Sets the behavior of automatic power off.
High Humid Mode OFF Sets whether to enable the humidity
mode.
MF(Tone)/DP(Pulse) Tone Selects a dialing method.
Reception Mode Fax Ready
Mode
Sets the reception mode.
DRD Type Type1 Sets the DRD Type.
Dial Tone Detection OFF Sets whether to detect a dial tone.
Busy Tone Detection OFF Sets whether to detect a busy tone.
Monitor Control OFF Select any one from three choices: Not
to monitor. Monitor till receiving/transmit-
ting the first valid facsimile signal. Execute
monitoring during communication.
Monitor Volume Middle Sets the Monitor Volume.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
- 103 -
Configuring at the Operator Panel
6
*1 A message appears confirming you that continuing deletes all settings and registered data.
Select [Yes] to continue. Select [No] to cancel.
Note
If you use the machine for a long time when [Power Save] is [OFF], it may affect the lifetime of electronic components.
TTI Reg-
ister/Edit
TTI 1 (NULL) Registers or changes the transmission ter-
minal identification (the name of a
sender). Maximum 22 characters.
TTI 2
TTI 3
Standard TTI TTI 1 Selects the default sender's name from
the registered list.
TTI Number (NULL) Registers your fax number.
TTI Calendar Type dd/mm/yyyy
or mm/dd/
yyyy
Sets the calendar date format of sender's
information.
Super G3 ON Sets whether to use Super G3 (ultra high-
speed communication mode).
Erase Privacy Data
*1
Execute All entered data including E-mail
addresses and speed dialing data, jobs,
and logs are deleted. All printer settings
are returned to the factory defaults.
Item
Factory
Default
Description
- 104 -
7. Useful Software
This chapter explains useful software functions for using your machine.
List of Utilities
The following is a list of utilities that you can use for your machine. For details on how to use these
utilities, refer to each section.
Utilities common to Windows/Mac OS X
Windows Utilities
Item
Function
Scope
Details
System
Requirements
Refer to
PS Gamma Adjuster Utility
(for MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
Printing You can adjust the density of
pictures by adjusting the
CMYK color and halftone
density of each color.
Windows 8/Windows
Server 2012/Windows 7/
Windows Vista/Windows
Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008/
Windows XP/Windows
Server 2003
Mac OS X 10.4-10.8
page 109
Print Job Accounting Client Managing
the
machine
Sets the user name and job
account ID to the print driver.
page 120
page 130
Network Card Setup Machine
settings
You can configure settings for
the network
page 124
page 131
Operator Panel language
setup/Panel Language Setup
Machine
settings
You can change the operating
panel or menu display language
and setup the country code and
date and time.
page 122
page 130
Item
Function
Scope
Details
System
Requirements
Refer to
Configuration Tool Machine
settings
You can change the access
control settings and menu on
the machine, and register e-
mail addresses, speed dial
numbers, profiles, PIN
numbers, auto delivery
settings and network scan
settings.
The Auto Delivery function
does not operate on machines
that do not have an SD card
inserted.
Registering Forms (Form
Overlay), job management
and network setting.
Windows 8/Windows
Server 2012/Windows 7/
Windows Vista/Windows
Server 2008 R2/Windows
Server 2008/Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003
page 111
PDF Print Direct
(for MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
Printing Prints out PDF files without
launching any applications.
Windows 8/Windows
Server 2012/Windows 7/
Windows Vista/Windows
Server 2008 R2/Windows
Server 2008/Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003
-
List of Utilities
- 105 -
Useful Software
7
Mac OS X Utilities
*1
The utility that comes with
*1
is not on the Software DVD-ROM. Please download this from the
Okidata website.
*2
TELNET is a function supported for OS.
ActKey Scan A one-touch tool that allows
images acquired from a
scanner to be saved to a
folder, sent to an application
or sent via a fax service.
Windows 8/Windows
Server 2012/Windows 7/
Windows Vista/Windows
Server 2008 R2/Windows
Server 2008/Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003
page 43
OKI LPR Utility Printing You can print a document via
the network connection,
manage print jobs, and check
the machine status.
Windows 8/Windows
Server 2012/Windows 7/
Windows Vista/Windows
Server 2008 R2/Windows
Server 2008/Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003
page 125
TELNET
*2
Machine
settings
You can do network settings
for the machine.
page 128
Web Driver Installer
*1
Managing
the
machine
Is connected to the network,
and manages Okidata printers
or combined units.
Windows XP/Windows
Server 2003
For details, refer to the
Okidata website.
-
PrintSuperVision
*1
Managing
the
machine
This is a web-based
application which manages
printers connected to the
network. You can use this to
check setting information and
information on consumables
for multiple devices.
Windows 8/Windows
Server 2012/Windows 7/
Windows Vista/Windows
Server 2008 R2/Windows
Server 2008/Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003
For details, refer to the
Okidata website.
-
Network Extension Managing
the
machine
You can check the machine
settings from the print driver,
and can set options. This
utility is automatically
installed when installing a
print driver through a network
connection.
Windows 8/Windows
Server 2012/Windows 7/
Windows Vista/Windows
Server 2008 R2/Windows
Server 2008/Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003
A computer operating with
TCP/IP.
page 127
Item
Function
Scope
Details
System
Requirements
Refer to
Network Scanner Setup Tool Scan Is initially launched when a
scanner driver is selected from
an application, and you can
select the target equipment to
connect to.
It is not necessary to set the
connection target after the
first time.
Mac OS X 10.4.0-10.8 page 132
Item
Function
Scope
Details
System
Requirements
Refer to
Installing Utilities
- 106 -
Installing Utilities
If there is a utility that you would like to use, follow the procedure below for Windows. For Mac OS X,
you can copy it by dragging and dropping to the place you want. You can also run this directly from the
Software DVD-ROM.
Memo
For Windows, if you have PaperPort installed, you can install this from the Application DVD-ROM.
For Windows
1 Insert the Software DVD-ROM into your
computer
2 Click [Run setup.exe].
[If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
3 Select language click [Next].
4 Select the device and click [Next].
5 Read the user license agreement and
click on [I Agree].
6 Read the Environment advice for Users
and then click [Next].
7 Click on [Device Configuration],
[Software] or on [Optional Software].
8 Select the utility you would like to install.
9 Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete the installation.
10 Click [Finish].
For Mac OS X
1 Insert the Software DVD-ROM into the
computer
2 Double click on the [OKI]>[Utilities]
folder.
3 Copy the folder you want to install by
dragging and dropping to your
Applications folder.
Memo
To start up, double click on the utility icon within the folder.
Utilities common to Windows/Mac OS X
- 107 -
Useful Software
7
Utilities common to Windows/Mac OS X
This section explains webpages that can be used by both Windows and Mac OS X.
When using webpages, the following conditions must be met.
TCP/IP must be enabled.
One of the following must be installed: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later, Safari 3.0 or later, or Firefox 3.0 or
later.
Memo
Either set your webpage security settings to a medium level, or enable cookies.
[In order to access the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is required. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Webpage
You can carry out the following operations from
the webpage.
Display the machine status.
Create profiles.
Configure tray, network, function default, and
machine settings.
Display the job list.
Print out a PDF without a printer driver.
Configure the auto delivery (MB491, MB491+LP,
ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only) and
transmission data save functions.
If an SD card is not inserted, the Auto Delivery
function will not operate.
Link to frequently used webpages.
Memo
In order to change the machine settings on the webpage,
you need to be logged in as the administrator.
Reference
For details on how to configure the network settings, refer
to "Changing Network Settings From the Web Page" P. 156.
Access the machine webpage.
1 Launch your web browser.
2 Type in "http:// (machine's IP address)"
in the address bar and press the
<Enter> key.
Reference
For the machine's IP address, please refer to the
User's Manual Basic.
Log in as the administrator.
Note
You must be authorized as the administrator.
Memo
The default administrator password of the machine is
"aaaaaa".
1 Click on [Administrator Login] on the
main page.
2 Enter "root" in [Username] and enter
the administrator password in
[Password], and then click [OK].
For Mac OS X, type in "root" for [Name] and enter
the machine administrator's password in
[Password], and then click [Login].
Utilities common to Windows/Mac OS X
- 108 -
3 Click [SKIP].
If you have made changes to the settings on this
screen, click [OK].
The menus available only for the administrator will
be displayed.
Changing the Administrator's
password.
You can change the machine administrator's
password from the webpage. The administrator's
password set on the webpage can be used when
logging into the machine through the control
panel or through webpage.
Memo
The password should be 6-12 characters long, and should
be in half-byte (normal English) characters.
The password is case sensitive.
1 Launch your web browser and enter the
machine's IP address.
2 Select [Administration Settings].
3 Select [Management]>
[Administrator Password].
4 Enter a new password in [New
Password].
5 Reenter the password in [Confirm
Password].
The entered password will not be displayed. Write
down your password and store it in a safe place.
6 Click on [Send].
The network system reboots to enable the new
settings.
Memo
You do not need to restart the machine. Next time when
you log in as the administrator, use the new password.
Checking Machine Status
You can check the status of your machine from
the webpage.
1 Launch your web browser and enter the
machine's IP address.
The status of the machine is displayed.
Memo
When logging in as the administrator, you can also click on
[Status Window] in order to view the simplified display
of the machine status.
Changing Machine Settings
You can change the main unit's settings from the
webpage.
1 Launch your web browser and log in as
the administrator.
2 Change the settings and click [Send].
Get the Date and Time Automatically
You can get date and time information
automatically from an Internet time server, and
reflect this on your machine.
1 Launch your web browser and log in as
the administrator.
2 Select [Administrator Setup].
3 Select [Initial Operating Settings]>
[Time Setup].
4 Specify your time zone.
5 Select [Automatic] from [Set time].
6 Enter the SNTP server in [SNTP Server
(Primary)].
7 If required, enter another SNTP server in
[SNTP Server (Secondary)].
8 Click on [Send].
The network system reboots to enable the new
settings.
Memo
When using SNTP, you cannot set the time from the
operating panel.
PS Gamma Adjuster Utility (for MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
- 109 -
Useful Software
7
PS Gamma Adjuster Utility (for MB451/MB451w/
MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
This section explains the PS Gamma Adjuster Utility. You can adjust the print density of photos by
adjusting the half-tone density of the printer.
Note
The PS printer driver can be used.
Printing speed may be slow if this function is used. If you want to prioritize the speed, uncheck [Custom Gamma
Adjustment:].
Some applications can specify the half-tone settings. If you use these functions, uncheck [Custom Gamma Adjustment:].
If you are using Windows, [Half-tone adjustment] menu or the contents may not be displayed on the [Job options] tab. In
this case, restart your computer.
If you are using an application before registering the half-tone adjustment name, restart the application before printing.
[The registered half-tone adjustment name is effective for all printers of the same type if the multiple printers are saved in the
[Printers and FAX] folder.
Reference
For details on how to install the PS Gamma Adjuster utility, refer to "Installing Utilities" P. 106.
Registering Halftone
For Windows PS Drivers
1 Click [Start] and select [All Programs]>
[Okidata]>[PS Gamma Adjuster]>
[PS Gamma Adjuster].
2 Select the machine from [Select
Printer].
3 Click on [New].
4 Adjust the half-tone.
You can select a method to adjust the half-tone
from operating the graph line, entering the
gamma value, or entering the density value into
the text box.
5 Enter setting name in [Gamma Curve
Name] and then click [OK].
6 Click on [Add].
7 Click on [Apply].
A dialog box appears.
8 Click on [OK].
9 Click on [Exit] to quit the PS Halftone
Adjuster utility.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1 Launch the PS Gamma Adjuster utility.
2 Click on [New].
3 Adjust the half-tone.
You can select a method to adjust the half-tone
from operating the graph line, entering the
gamma value, or entering the density value into
the text box.
4 Enter setting name in [Gamma Curve
Name] and then click [Save].
5 Click on [Select PPD].
6 Select the PPD file to register the
halftone adjustment and click[Open].
7 Select the gamma curves created and
click [Add].
8 Click on [Save].
PS Gamma Adjuster Utility (for MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
- 110 -
9 Enter the administratorís name and
password and click [OK].
10 Exit the PS Gamma Adjuster.
11 Select [Print & Fax] from [System
Preferences] to delete and reregister all
printers for which adjustments were
made.
Printing a File With the
Adjusted Gamma Curve
For Windows PS Drivers
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3 Click on [Preferences].
4 Select the [Job Options] tab, check
[Custom Gamma Adjustment:], select
the half-tone adjustment setting, and
then click [OK].
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select [Printer Features] from the
panel menu.
4 Select the half-tone adjustment setting
from Halftone Adjustment on [Job
Options] on the [Custom gamma]
panel.
Windows Utilities
- 111 -
Useful Software
7
Windows Utilities
This section explains utilities you can use in Windows.
Memo
When using the User Setting plugin, the administrator password is required. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Configuration Tool
In the Configuration Tool, you can manage
multiple units and change settings.
The Configuration Tool functions are as follows.
Display device information
Device menu settings
Copy device settings
Change device password
Register and edit email addresses, speed dial
numbers, PINs, and network scan addresses
Register and edit device profile
Set access control
Register and edit automated delivery (MB491,
MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb
only)
If an SD card is not inserted, the automatic delivery
and communication data save function are not
supported.
Sort list of emails, speed dial numbers, profiles, and
network scan addresses
Registering Forms (Form Overlay)
Job Management
Network Setting
Note
Even when connected using a wireless LAN, the displayed
MAC address becomes the MAC address of the wired LAN.
Setup
Plugins can be installed, as required.
The following 5 types of plugin are available.
User Setting Plugin
Device Setting Plugin
Alert Info Plugin
Network Setting Plugin
Storage Manager Plugin
1 Insert the Software DVD-ROM into the
computer.
A window is displayed.
2
[
Configuration Tool
] from [
Software
].
3 Select the plugin to install.
4 Specify the folder into which you would
like the software to install.
The initial setting for this is C:/Program Files/
Okidata/Configuration Tool.
5 Click on [Install].
6 If a message is displayed saying that
installation is complete, click on [Close].
Memo
You can install additional plugins later.
Registering the Machine
When using the Configuration Tool or introducing
a new machine, register the machine in the
Configuration Tool.
1 Select [Start], [All Programs]>
[Okidata]>[Configuration Tool]>
[Configuration Tool].
2 Select [Register Device] from the
[Tools] menu.
Search results are displayed.
3 Select the machine and click on
[Register].
4 On the confirmation screen, click on
[Yes].
Windows Utilities
- 112 -
Removing a Machine
You can removes a registered machine
1 Right-click on the machine from
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select [Remove device].
3 On the confirmation screen, click on
[Yes].
Check the Status of the Machine.
Check the status and information of the machine.
1 Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [Device Info] tab.
Memo
When the machine is connected to the network, [Device
Status] will be displayed.
If you want to update information, click on [Update
Device Information].
Set the Email Address
With the User Setting plugin, you can register the
machine's email address or edit it.
The following explains some of the functions.
Note
When using the following functions, please install the User
Setting plugin.
Reference
For how to install the plugin, please refer to "Setup" P. 111.
Icon
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Exporting Addresses to a File.
1 Select machine from which to export,
from the [Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [E-mail Address Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Enter the folder name and name of the
folder to be saved to, and click on
[Save].
Note
After exporting, an edited CSV file may not restore
properly.
Importing Addresses from a File.
1 Select from which device to import, from
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [E-mail Address Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Select [Open] from [Select CSV File].
7 Select the file you want to import and
click on [Open].
8 Click on [Next].
9 Select the settings to import and click
[Import].
10 Click .
Memo
CSV files exported by Outlook Express (Windows email and
Windows Live email) can also be restored.
Icon Details
Registers a new email
address.
Registers a new email
address group.
Saves settings on the
machine.
Deletes the selected item.
Deletes the selected item and
moves other items up.
Deletes all items.
Exports current settings to a
file.
Imports settings from a file.
Return to the main page.
Icon Details
Windows Utilities
- 113 -
Useful Software
7
Set Speed Dials
You can register and edit speed dials on the
machine.
The following explains some of the functions.
Note
When using the speed dial manager, please install the User
Setting plugin.
Reference
For how to install the plugin, please refer to "Setup" P. 111.
Icon
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Memo
The functions of the other icons are the same as explained
in "Set the Email Address" P. 112.
Reference
For details on icons, please refer to "Icon" P. 112.
Exporting Speed Dials to a File.
1 Select the machine from which to export,
from the [Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on the [Speed Dial Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Enter the file name, select the folder to
save the file to, and click [Save].
Note
After exporting, the edited CSV file may not restore
properly.
Import Speed Dials from a File.
1 Select from which device to import, from
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on the [Speed Dial Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Select [Open] from [Select CSV File].
7 Select the file you want to import and
click on [Open].
8 Click on [Next].
9 Select the settings to import and click
[Import].
10 Click .
Memo
CSV files exported by Outlook Express (Windows email and
Windows Live email) can also be restored.
Setting Profiles
You can register and edit machine profiles.
The following explains some of the functions.
Note
When using the profile manager, please install the User
Setting plugin.
Reference
For how to install the plugin, please refer to "Setup" P. 111.
Icon
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Memo
The functions of the other icons are the same as explained
in "Set the Email Address" P. 112.
Reference
For details on icons, please refer to "Icon" P. 112.
Icon Details
Register a new speed dial
number.
Register a new speed dial
number group.
Icon Details
Registers a new profile.
Copies the details of items
for which you have checked
the checkbox, and creates a
new profile.
Windows Utilities
- 114 -
Exporting Profiles to a File.
1 Select machine from which to export,
from the [Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [Profile Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Check the contents of the displayed
message and click [OK].
7 Enter the file name, select the folder to
save the file to, and click [Save].
Note
After exporting, the edited CSV file may not restore
properly.
Importing Profiles from a File.
1 Select machine from which to import,
from [Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [Profile Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Check the contents of the displayed
message text and click on [OK].
7 Select the file you want to import and
click on [Open].
8 Select the settings to import and click
[Import].
9 Click .
Setting a PIN
You can control access to the machine.
Icon
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Create a new PIN
1 Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [PIN Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Click .
7 Enter the PIN number you would like to
use.
8 Check each item as required and click
[OK].
9 Click .
Changing PIN Settings
1
Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [PIN Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Select the PIN number for which you
want to change the settings.
7 Change settings as required and click on
[OK].
8 Click .
Deleting a PIN
1 Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
Icon Details
Registers a new PIN.
Registers a new user.
Windows Utilities
- 115 -
Useful Software
7
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [PIN Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Select the checkbox for the PIN you want
to delete.
7 Click .
8 On the confirmation screen, click on
[Yes].
9 Click .
Exports the PIN to a file.
1 Select machine from which to export,
from the [Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [PIN Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Click .
7 Enter the file name, select the folder to
save the file to, and click [Save].
Note
After exporting, the edited CSV file may not restore
properly.
Imports PINs from a file.
1
Select machine from which to import,
from [Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [PIN Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Click .
7 Select the file you want to import and
click on [Open].
8 Select the settings to import and click
[Import].
9 Click .
Creating a New User
1 Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [PIN Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Enter username and password.
7 Select either an existing PIN from [PIN
Number], or select [Create New].
8 When selecting [Create New], enter the
PIN number into [New PIN Number],
set each value as required, and click
[OK].
9 Click [Close].
10 Click .
Memo
"Admin" cannot be registered as a new username.
Changing User Settings
1 Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [PIN Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Select username to change.
6 Change settings as required and click on
[OK].
7 Click .
Deleting Users
1 Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [PIN Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
Windows Utilities
- 116 -
5 Select the checkbox for the user you
want to delete.
6 Click .
7 On the confirmation screen, click on
[Yes].
8 Click .
Set a network scan
You can register and edit address to use for
network scans.
Icon
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Memo
The functions of the other icons are the same as explained
in "Set the Email Address" P. 112.
Reference
Regarding icons, please refer to "Icon" P. 112.
Exports network scan settings to a
file.
1 Select device from which to export, from
the [Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [Network Scan Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Enter the file name, select the folder to
save the file to, and click [Save].
Note
After exporting, the edited CSV file may not restore
properly.
Imports network scan settings
from a file.
1 Select from which device to import, from
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [Network Scan Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Select the file you want to import and
click on [Open].
7 Select the import settings and click on
[Import].
8 Click .
Deletes network scan settings
1 Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [Network Scan Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Select the sending destination you would
like to delete.
6 Click .
Device Setting Plugin
With the Device Setting plugin, you can change
the machine menu and copy settings to another
device.
Icon
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Save settings to a file.
1 Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2 Click on the [Device Setting] tab.
3 Click on [Menu settings].
4 Click .
5 Enter the file name, select the folder to
save the file to, and click [Save].
Icon Details
Register a new network scan
send destination.
Icon Details
Save the device settings
displayed on the screen to a
file.
Restore file settings saved on
an external file.
Windows Utilities
- 117 -
Useful Software
7
Restoring Settings from a File
1 Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2 Click on the [Device Setting] tab.
3 Click on [Menu settings].
4 Click .
5 Check the details of the displayed
message and click [Yes].
6 Select the file you would like to restore
and click [Open].
7 Click .
Setting Passwords
1 Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2 Click on the [Device Setting] tab.
3 Click on [Change password].
4 Enter the current password and new
password and click [OK].
Alert Info Plugin
You can use the Alert Info plug-in to display a
message on your computer when a job finishes.
With this software, an "Event" is called when a
job is completed.
Note
The Alert Info plugin can be used with devices connected
to the network.
Set the time and time zone of the machine to those of your
computer.
Basic Settings
You can set basic settings of the Alert-Info
plugin.
1 Select [Alert Info] from the [Plug-ins]
menu.
2 Select [Basic settings].
3 Change the settings as required.
4 Click on [Update].
Device Settings
The Alert Info plugin settings can be changed for
each device
1 Select [Alert Info] from the [Plug-ins]
menu.
2 Select [Setting devices].
3 Click on [Update device].
4 Select the device you would like to set.
5 Change the settings as required and click
on [OK].
Filter Settings
You can set display alert conditions for sending or
receiving a fax, printing, or sending and
receiving emails and Internet faxes.
1 Select [Alert Info] from the [Plug-ins]
menu.
2 Select [Filter settings].
3 Click on the event button you would like
to set.
4 Change the settings as required.
5 Click on [OK].
Memo
Up to 100 senders can be registered as e-mail, Internet
fax, or fax sender.
Checking Logs
You can check whether there are any records
registered for the machine, from the event log.
1 Select [Alert Info] from the [Plug-ins]
menu.
2 Select [Display log].
Memo
You can check the total number of recorded events in [Log
Number List].
You can see details of recorded logs in [Log details]
Network Setting Plugin
You can set the network with the Configuration
Tool. Prior to setting, please install the Network
Setting plugin.
Reference
For details on how to make network settings, please refer
to "Changing Network Settings From the Web Page" P. 156.
Icon
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Icon Details
Searches again for the
machine.
Changes search conditions
for machine.
Windows Utilities
- 118 -
Searches for the machine on the
network
Searches for the machine.
1 Select [Network Setting] from the
[Plug-ins] menu.
2 Select [Discover Devices].
Search results are displayed.
Set search conditions
1 Select [Network Setting] from the
[Plug-ins] menu.
2 Select [Environment Settings]
3 Set the search settings as required and
click [OK].
Change the IP Address
Changes IP address for the machine.
1 Select the machine from the device list.
2 Click .
3 Change the settings as required.
4 Click on [OK].
5 Enter the network password and click
[OK].
The default password is the last 6 alphanumerical
digits of the MAC address
6 Click on [OK] to restart the machine.
Cloning Settings
Cloning machine settings
You can copies machine settings to a different
device.
1 Select the source to be cloned from the
[Registered Device Table].
2 Click on the [Device Setting] tab.
3 Click on [Cloning].
4 Select the target to be cloned to and
click [Execute].
5 Enter the password for the cloning
source and target and click on [OK].
Note
If [Failed] is displayed for any of the targets, cloning has
failed. Perform cloning again for these targets.
The administrator password, network menu and parts of
the other menus are not cloned.
Cloning user settings
You can copy user settings to a different device.
1 Select the source to be cloned from the
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [Cloning].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Select target to be cloned to and cloning
settings
6 Click on [Execute].
7 Enter the password for the target to be
cloned to and click on [OK].
Results are displayed.
Note
If [Failed] is displayed for any of the targets, cloning has
failed. Perform cloning again for these targets.
If the cloning source uses e-mail addresses, speed dialing,
profiles or automatic transmission from the control panel,
web browser or other configuration tool, the functions that
use these operations cannot be cloned.
If the cloning target uses e-mail addresses, speed dialing,
profiles or automatic transmission from the control panel,
web browser or other configuration tool, or if the time
specification transmission is registered, the functions that
use these operations cannot be cloned.
Changes IP address for a
machine.
Restarts the machine.
Changes network password.
Displays the set machine
webpage.
Icon Details
Windows Utilities
- 119 -
Useful Software
7
Storage Manager Plugin
Using Storage Manager Plug-in makes it possible
to manage jobs to be stored in devices and store
forms and fonts used for printing.
Note
For job management function, the encrypted secure job is
unsupported.
The function such as overlay is available even if a model is
not equipped with SD memory card.
Icon
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Check the Free Space in SD
Memory Cards or Flash Memory
You can check the free space in SD memory
cards and flash memory.
1 Clicking a device name in the device
selection area at the bottom of the
Storage Manager Plug-in window opens a
device resource window of the selected
device.
2 The dialog box shows storage, partitions,
directories and files by communicating
with the device.
Delete Unwanted Jobs From an SD
Memory Card
You can delete print jobs in an SD memory card's
[COMMON] partition.
Memo
Even after a confirmatory printing or saving of print data,
as the job remains in the [COMMON] partition, if it is not
deleted the capacity of the SD card will decrease.
Note
Encrypted authorized prints cannot be deleted on the
Storage Manager Plug-in.
1 Clicking icon, opens the Job
Management dialog.
2 To view a specific user's print jobs, enter
the password and click on [Apply job
password].
To view all print jobs, enter the
administrator password and click on
[Apply administrator password].
"Administrator password" is the
password for administration of the device.
3 Select the job you want to delete and
click icon.
4 Click on [OK].
Registering Forms (Form Overlay)
You can create and register overlays such as
logos or forms for printing. This explains how to
register forms
.
Reference
For how to print overlays, please refer here "Overlay
Printing" P. 64
Memo
When using a Windows PS printer driver, administrator
rights are required.
The Windows PCL XPS printer driver cannot be used.
Icon Details
Creates a new project.
Opens an existing project.
Overwrites and saves the file
with the currently selected
project.
Assigns a new name to the
currently selected project
and stores it to a file.
Adds a file to a project.
Deletes the selected file from
the project.
Displays the Filter Macro File
dialog box.
Converts the currently selected
project into a format that is
downloadable directly into a
device, and creates a new file.
Sends an existing download
file to the device selected in
the device selection area.
Sends the currently selected
project to the device selected
in the device selection area.
Sends the file selected from
the project window to the
device selected in the device
selection area.
Displays a Job Management
window for the device selected
in the device selection area.
Displays an Administrator
Functions window for the
device selected in the device
selection area.
Windows Utilities
- 120 -
Create a form
1 Click on [Start] and then select
[Devices and Printers].
2
Right click on the MB491 icon, and select
[
Printer Properties
]>[
OKI MB491(*)
].
*Select the required driver type
3 Select the [Ports] tab, check [FILE:]
from [Printer Port], and click on [OK].
4 Create a form you want to register on
the machine.
5 Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
6 Click on [Preferences].
When using the Windows PCL printer driver, click
[Vector] in [Print Mode] on the [Job Options]
tab using the [OK] key, then go to step 9.
7 Select the [Job Options] tab, and click
on [Overlay].
8 Select [Create Form].
9 Start a print job.
10 Enter the file name you would like to
save.
11 Return to [Printer Port] from the
[Ports] tab.
Register a Form on the Machine
Using the Storage Manager Plug-in
1 Click icon.
2
Click icon, and select the created form.
The form is added to the project.
3 Click on the form file.
4 Enter the [ID], and click [OK].
Note
Do not change [Target Volume] and [Path].
Memo
When using the Windows PS printer driver, enter
[Component].
5 Select the device in the device selection
area at the bottom of the Storage
Manager Plug-in window.
6 Click icon.
7 Click on [OK].
PDF Print Direct (for MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191
MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
You can send a PDF file to the machine and print
it directly. With PDF Print Direct, the procedure
for opening PDF files with applications such as
Adobe Reader has been shortened.
Print a PDF file.
1 Check that there is the [OKI MB491(*)]
icon in the [Devices and Printers]
folder.
2 Right-click on the PDF you would like to
print, and select [PDF Print Direct].
A window is displayed.
3 Select the printer driver from [Select
Printer].
When setting the user verification function on the
selected printer driver, select [User Auth] from
the [Printer Settings] menu.
4 If you want to print an encrypted file, put
a check in [Set Password] and enter
the password.
In order to use the same password after this, click
on [Save Password].
5 Change the setting as required and click
on [Print].
Print Job Accounting Client
This is client software for Print Job Accounting.
You can set the user name and Job Account ID in
the print driver.
Note
If you carry out an update and reinstallation of the printer
driver, it will be in non-compatible mode, so please set it
back to job account mode. However, if you are using a
function with all the printer drivers set to the same mode,
you do not need to set the mode back.
Windows Utilities
- 121 -
Useful Software
7
Setting the user name and job
account ID.
Can set the user name and job account ID in the
printer driver properties.
1 Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs]>[Okidata]>[Print Job
Accounting Client]>[Change Job
Accounting Mode].
2 Select the driver you would like to set
from the driver list.
If you would like all printer drivers to be set to the
same mode, click on [
Set the same mode
for All drivers.
].
3 Select [Tab] and click on [Change].
A window is displayed.
4 Click on [OK].
5 Select [Close] from the [File] menu.
6 Click on [Start] and then select
[Devices and Printers].
7 Right click on the printer icon and select
[Printer Properties].
8 Select the [Job Accounting] tab, enter
the user name and job account ID, and
click on [OK].
Setting Pop-Up Mode
When using this function, you need to enter a
user name and job account ID when starting
printing.
1 Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs]>[Okidata]>[Print Job
Accounting Client]>[Change Job
Accounting Mode].
2 Select the driver you would like to set
from the driver list.
If you would like all printer drivers to be set to the
same mode, click on [Set the same mode for All
drivers].
3 Select [Popup] and click on [Change].
A window is displayed.
4 Click on [OK].
5 Select [Close] from the [File] menu.
Set a job account ID for each user in
Hide mode.
The system manager can create and register
beforehand an ID file with the job account ID and
user name for the user name to log in to Windows.
The user does not need to enter their user name
and job account ID at the time of printing, as they
can be identified with this software.
Hide mode can be used for shared printers.
1 An ID file can be created in Notepad or
using spreadsheet software.
Memo
ID files are registered in the following order.
Username, (the username entered when logging into
Windows), User ID (the user ID corresponding to the
username), and Username (the username used for
print job accounting).
The user name can be omitted. If it is omitted, the
login name will be used as the username.
Each item is separated with a comma.
For spreadsheet software, each line has one user, with
a login name, job account ID and user name.
2 The file should be saved in a CSV
extension format.
3 Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs]>[Okidata]>[Print Job
Accounting Client]>Select [Change
Job Accounting Mode].
4 Select the driver you would like to set
from the driver list.
If you would like all printer drivers to be set to the
same mode, click on [Set the same mode for All
drivers].
Note
If using a shared printer, please do not use the
function setting all print drivers to the same mode. If
printing on the client side of a shared printer, account
information will not be output.
5 Select [Hide] and click on [Change].
6 Click on [OK].
7 Select [Import ID File] from the [Hide
Mode] menu.
8 Specify a file created in step 1 and click
[Open].
9 Uncheck [Set fixed Job Account ID for
all users]from the [Hide Mode] menu.
10 Select [Close] from the [File] menu.
Windows Utilities
- 122 -
Allocates the same ID to all users in
hide mode.
1 Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs]>[Okidata]>[Print Job
Accounting Client]>[Change Job
Accounting Mode].
2 Select the driver you would like to set
from the driver list.
If you would like all printer drivers to be set to the
same mode, click on [Set the same mode for All
drivers].
3 Select [Hide] and click on [Change].
A window is displayed.
4 Click on [OK].
5 Select [Set fixed Job Account ID for
all users] from the [Hide Mode] menu.
6 Select [Setup Fixed Job Account ID]
from the [Hide Mode] menu.
7 Enter the user name and job account ID
and click on [OK].
8 Select [Close] from the [File] menu.
Do not Distinguish Between Users
This recognizes all jobs as having unregistered
IDs. The user name left in the Windows login
name and job account ID is "0". If it is not
necessary to distinguish between users, use "Not
supported Mode".
1 Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs]>[Okidata]>[Print Job
Accounting Client]>[Change Job
Accounting Mode].
2 Select the driver you would like to set
from the driver list.
If you would like all printer drivers to be set to the
same mode, click on [Set the same mode for All
drivers].
3 Select [Not Supported] and click on
[Change].
4 Click on [OK].
5 Select [Close] from the [File] menu.
Operator Panel Language Setup
You can change the operating panel display
language and set country code and date and time.
Note
This program uses the print driver. Please install the
printer driver on the computer beforehand.
Change the operating panel display
language
1 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power.
2 Plug in the computer, and insert the
Software DVD-ROM.
3 Click [Run setup.exe].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
4 Select language and click [Next].
Windows Utilities
- 123 -
Useful Software
7
5 Select the model and click [OK].
6 Read the user license agreement and
click [I Agree].
7 Select [Device Configuration].
8 Click [Change the Printer Display
Language].
9 Check [Language] and click [Next].
(MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/
MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191
MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb only)
10 Click on [Next].
11 Select the model name of the machine
and click on [Next].
12 Select the language and click on [Next].
13
Click on [
Print Test Page
] and click on
[
Next
].
14 Check whether the printed menu
language format value in step 13 is in
the value range displayed on the screen.
15 Click on [Next].
16 Check the contents of the settings and
click on [Setup].
17 Click [Finish].
18
Check that the language you want is
displayed is on the screen of the machine.
19 Restart the machine.
Note
If the language selection screen is not selected, carry
out the following procedure.
a)[Click on [Start] and select [Search for
Programs and Files].
b)
Enter "D:/Utilities/PanelDwn/oppnlngs.exe"
and press the <
Enter
> key.
(This example shows a case with the
DVD-ROM drive (D:))
c)Follow step 4.
Setup the country code (MB451/
MB451w/MB471/MB471w/MB491/
MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb only)
1 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power.
2 Plug in the computer, and insert the
Software DVD-ROM.
3 Click [Run setup.exe].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
4 Select language and click [Next].
5 Select the model and click [OK].
6 Read the user license agreement and
click [I Agree].
7 Select [Device Configuration].
8 Click [Change the Printer Display
Language].
9 Check [Country Code] and click [Next].
10 Click on [Next].
11 Select the model name of the machine
and click on [Next].
12
Select the country code and click on [
Next
].
13 Click on [Setup].
Setup the date and time (MB451/
MB451w/MB471/MB471w/MB491/
MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb only)
1 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power.
2 Plug in the computer, and insert the
Software DVD-ROM.
3 Click [Run setup.exe].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
4 Select language and click [Next].
5 Select the model and click [OK].
6 Read the user license agreement and
click [I Agree].
7 Select [Device Configuration].
8 Click [Change the Printer Display
Language].
9
Check [
Date and Time
] and click [
Next
].
10 Click on [Next].
11 Select the model name of the machine
and click on [Next].
12
Set the date and time and click on [
Next
].
13 Click on [Setup].
Windows Utilities
- 124 -
Network Card Setup
You can use the Network Card Setup to configure
the network.
In order to use Network Card Setup, TCP/IP
needs to be activated.
Note
This requires administrator rights.
Even when connected using a wireless LAN, the displayed
MAC address becomes the MAC address of the wired LAN.
Memo
To check the machine MAC address, press the <SETTINGS>
key, and on the machine operating panel select [View
Information]>[Network].
Launching the Utility
1 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power.
2 Turn on you computer, and insert the
Software DVD-ROM.
3 Click [Run setup.exe].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
4 Select the device and click [Next].
5 Read the user license agreement and
click on [I Agree].
6 Select [Device Configuration]>
[Network Card Setup Utility].
Configuring Network Settings
1 Launch Network Card Setup.
2 Select the machine from a list.
3 Select [Setting Printer] from the
[Setting] menu.
4 Change the items as required and click
on [OK].
5 Enter your password into [Password]
and click on [OK].
- The default password is the last 6 alphanumerical
digits of the Ethernet address.
- The password is case sensitive.
6 Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
The machine restarts to enable the new settings.
During the restart, the machine status icon
changes to red. The machine will restart, the new
settings will become active, and the status icon
will turn green.
Set Web settings
You can launch the webpage, and set the main
unit network.
Enable Web Settings
1 Launch Network Card Setup.
2 Select the machine from the list.
3 Select [Setting Printer] from the
[Setting] menu.
4 Select the [Printer Web Page] tab.
5 Select [Printer Web Page - Enable]
and click on [OK].
6 Enter your password into [Password]
and click on [OK].
- The default password is the last 6 alphanumerical
digits of the ethernet address.
- The password is case sensitive.
7 Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
The network card restarts to enable the new
settings. During the restart, the machine status
icon changes to red. The machine network card
will restart, the new settings will be active, and
the status icon will turn green.
Opening a Webpage
1 Launch Network Card Setup.
2 Select your machine from the list.
3 Select [View Web Page] from the
[Setting] menu.
The webpage will restart, and the machine status
page will be displayed.
Windows Utilities
- 125 -
Useful Software
7
Changing the Password.
1 Launch Network Card Setup.
2 Select your machine from the list.
3 Select [Change Password] from the
[Setting] menu.
4 Enter the current password.
- The default password is the last 6 alphanumerical
digits of the ethernet address.
- The password is case sensitive.
5 Enter the new password, and reenter it
for confirmation.
The password is case sensitive.
6 Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
Change the Environment.
You can configure the machine search condition,
time-out value for each setting, and items to be
displayed on the list.
1 Launch Network Card Setup.
2 Select your machine from the list.
3 Select [Environment Settings] from
the [Option] menu.
4
Set the settings as required and click [
OK
].
OKI LPR Utility
You can perform a print job via network, manage
print jobs, check the machine status by the
utility.
In order to use OKI LPR Utility, TCP/IP must be
activated.
Note
The OKI LPR utility cannot be used for shared printers.
Please use the standard TCP/IP port.
Even when connected using a wireless LAN, the displayed
MAC address becomes the MAC address of the wired LAN.
Launching the Utility
1 Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs]>[Okidata]>[OKI LPR
Utility]>[OKI LPR Utility].
Adding a Printer
You can add a printer to the OKI LPR utility.
Note
This requires administrator rights.
If you cannot add a printer in Windows 8/Windows Server
2012/Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008
R2/Windows Server 2008, shut down OKI LPR utility first
and right-click on [Start] > [All Programs] > [Okidata]
> [OKI LPR Utility] > [OKI LPR Utility], and select
[Run as administrator] to launch.
Memo
You cannot add the printer which already registered at OKI
LPR utility. If you want to change the port, select [Confirm
Connections] in [Remote Print] menu.
1 Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2 Select [Add Printer] from the [Remote
Print] menu.
3 Select [Printer Name] and enter the IP
address.
Network printers and printers connected to the
LPR port are not displayed.
4 When selecting a network printer, select
[Discover].
5 Click on [OK].
Windows Utilities
- 126 -
Downloading Files
You can download a file to the printer you have
added to the OKI LPR utility.
1 Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2 Select the download destination printer.
3 Select [Download] from the [Remote
Print] menu.
4 Select a file and click on [Open].
Displaying the Machine Status
1 Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2 Select a printer.
3 Select [Printer Status] from [Remote
Print].
Checking/Deleting/Forwarding Jobs
You can confirm and delete print jobs also, if you
cannot print because the selected printer is busy,
offline or out of paper, you can forward the print
jobs to another OKI model printer.
Note
Print jobs can only be forwarded to the same OKI model
printer as the one you are using.
Before forwarding a job, you need to add another same
OKI model printer.
1 Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2 Select [Job Status] from the [Remote
Print] menu.
3 If you want to delete a print job, select
the job and then select [Delete Job]
from the [Job] menu.
4 If you want to forward a print job, select
the job and then select [Redirect] from
the [Job] menu.
Forwarding Jobs Automatically
If you cannot print because the selected printer
is busy, offline or out of paper, you can configure
the settings forward the print jobs to another
OKI model printer automatically.
Note
Print jobs can only be forwarded to the same OKI model
printer as the one you are using.
Before forwarding a job, you need to add another same
OKI model printer.
This requires administrator rights.
1 Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2 Select the printer you would like to set.
3 Select [Confirm Connections] from
[Remote Print] menu.
4 Click on [Details].
5 Select the [Automatic Job Redirect
Used] checkbox.
6 For forwarding jobs only when errors
occur, check [Redirect only at the time
of an error].
7 Click on [Add].
8 Enter the forwarding destination IP
address and click on [OK].
9 Click on [OK].
Print with Multiple Printers
You can print with multiple printers with a single
command.
Note
This function sends remote print jobs to multiple printers
and prints simultaneously.
This requires administrator rights.
1 Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2 Select the printer you would like to configure.
3 Select printer [Confirm Connections]
from [Remote Print] menu.
4 Click on [Details].
5 Select the [Print to more than one
printer at a time] checkbox.
6 Click on [Options].
7 Click on [Add].
Windows Utilities
- 127 -
Useful Software
7
8 Enter the IP address of the printer for
simultaneously printing and click on [OK].
9 Click on [OK].
Open a Webpage
You can open the machine webpage from the OKI
LPR utility.
1 Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2 Select a printer.
3 Select [Web Setting] from the
[Remote Print] menu.
Memo
You cannot open the webpage when the web port
number has been changed. Carry out the following
procedure, and reconfigure the OKI LPR utility port
number.
a)Select a printer.
b)Select [Confirm Connections] from
[Remote Print].
c)Click on [Details].
d)Enter the port number into [Port
Numbers].
e)Click on [OK].
Adding Comments to Printers
You can add comments to the printers added into
the OKI LPR utility, in order to identify them.
1 Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2 Select a printer.
3 Select [Confirm Connections] from
[Remote Print].
4 Enter a comment and click on [OK].
5 Select [Show comments] from the
[Option] menu.
Automatically Configuring the IP
Address
You can set it to ensure that the connection with
the original printer is maintained, even if the
printer's IP address is changed.
Memo
The IP address may change if DHCP is being used to
dynamically assign IP addresses or the network
administrator manually changes the printer's IP address.
Note
This requires administrator rights.
1 Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2 Select [Setup] from the [Option] menu.
3 Select the [Auto Reconnect] checkbox
and click on [OK].
Uninstall the OKI LPR Utility
Note
This requires administrator rights.
1 Confirm (or Ensure) that the OKI LPR
utility is closed.
2 Click on [Start], and then select [All
Program]>[Okidata]>[OKI LPR
Utility]>[Uninstall OKI LPR Utility].
[If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click on [
Yes].
3 On the confirmation screen, click on
[Yes].
Network Extension
In Network Extension you can check the settings
on the machine and set the composition of the
options.
In order to use Network Extension, TCP/IP must
be activated.
Note
This requires administrator rights.
Memo
Network Extension is automatically installed when
installing a print driver through a TCP/IP network.
The Network Extension is operated by linking with the
print driver. You cannot opt to only have Network
Extension installed.
Network Extension only functions when the printer driver
is connected to OKI LPR port or the standard TCP/IP port.
Windows Utilities
- 128 -
Launch the Utility
To use Network Extension, open the printer
properties screen.
1 Click on [Start] and then select
[Devices and Printers].
2 Right click on the printer icon and select
[Printer Properties].
Check Machine Settings
You can check the settings of the machine.
Memo
If you use Network Extension in an environment that is not
supported, the [Option] tab may not be displayed.
1 Open the printer properties screen.
Reference
"Launch the Utility" P. 128
2 Select the [Status] tab.
3 Click [Update].
4 Click [OK].
Reference
Click [Web Setting] to automatically launch the
webpage. You can change machine settings on this
webpage screen. For details, refer to "Webpage" P. 107.
Set Options Automatically
You can get the composition of options of the
connected machine and automatically set the
print driver.
Memo
You cannot configure this when using Network Extension in
unsupported environments.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS drivers.
1 Launch the printer properties screen.
Reference
"Launch the Utility" P. 128
2 Select the [Device Options] tab.
3 Click on [Get Printer Settings].
4 Click [OK].
For Windows PS Drivers
1 Launch the printer properties screen.
Reference
"Launch the Utility" P. 128
2 Select the [Device Settings] tab.
3 Click on [Get installed options
automatically] and then click on
[Setup].
4 Click [OK].
Uninstall the Utility
1 Click on [Start], and then select
[Control Panel]>[Add or Remove
Programs].
2 Select [OKI Network Extension] and
click on [Remove].
3 Follow the instructions on the screen and
complete the uninstallation.
TELNET
You can configure each type of setting with a
Telnet command.
Note
Telnet access to the machine settings is turned off in the
initial settings.
In order to use Telnet commands, set [Telnet] to
[Active], either on the webpage or on the machine control
panel.
For Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008, Telnet commands are inactive in
the initial settings.
In order to use Telnet commands, select [Start] >
[Control Panel] > [Programs] > [Programs and
Features] > [Turn Windows features on or off]. Set
[Telnet Client] to active in the displayed dialog box.
Memo
For the next procedure, the following environment will be
used as an example. The details may differ depending on
the OS you are using.
-OS: Windows 7
- IP Address: 192.168.0.2
- MAC Address: 00:80:87:84:9C:9B
1 Click on [Start] and select [All
Programs]>[Accessories]>
[Command Prompt].
Windows Utilities
- 129 -
Useful Software
7
2 Following "(Driver Path): /Users/
Username>" enter "ping (Space)
machine IP Address".<Press the
Enter> key and check that access is
enabled.
E.g.: "C:/Users/WINDOWS > ping 192.168.0.2"
3 Following "telnet (Space)", enter the IP
address of the machine and press the
<Enter> key, in order to access the
machine through Telnet.
E.g.: "C:/Users/WINDOWS>telnet 192.168.0.2"
4 After "login:" enter "root" and press the
<Enter>.
5 If a prompt is displayed, enter your
password following "Password" and press
the <Enter> key.
Enter E.g: "password: 849C9B".
Memo
The default "root" password is the last 6
alphanumerical digits of the machine's MAC address.
6 If a menu command is displayed, enter
the menu number you would like to
change, and press the <Enter> key.
7 Change the settings as required.
8 Save settings and log out of the
machine.
Mac OS X Utilities
- 130 -
Mac OS X Utilities
This section explains utilities you can use in Mac OS X.
Panel Language Setup
You can change the operating panel display
language.
1 Output a menu map for the machine.
To output settings, press the <SETTINGS> key,
and select [Print Report]>[Menu Map].
2 Launch the panel language setup utility.
Reference
"Installing Utilities" P. 106
3 Select a method of connection.
When selecting [TCP/IP], enter an IP address.
You can check the IP address on the menu map
output using procedure 1.
4 Click [OK].
5 For the menu map "Language Format"
value, check that the value displayed on
the screen matches the following
conditions.
Condition 1: The version beginning digit is to
match.
Condition 2: The value displayed on the screen
should be the same as the Language
Format value or a newer (higher)
one.
Memo
If Condition 1 is not met, language settings cannot be
downloaded. If Condition 1 is not met, an error will be
displayed in the control panel when downloading. In
order to restore, restart the machine. If Condition 1 is
met but Condition 2 is not, you can still use it although
part of the setting names will be displayed in English.
6 Select a language.
7 Click on [Download].
The language setting file will be sent to the
machine, and when sending is complete, a
message will be displayed.
8 Restarts the machine.
Print Job Accounting Client
This is client software for Print Job Accounting.
You can set the user name and user ID in the
print driver.
Registering a User ID
1 Launch the Print Job Accounting Client
utility.
Reference
"Installing Utilities" P. 106
2 Click [New].
3 Enter the Mac OS X login name, new
username, and new user ID, and click on
[Save].
4 Click on [Save].
5 Enter the password and click on [OK].
6 Quit Print Job Accounting Client.
Register Multiple Users at the Same
Time
You can use a CSV file to simultaneously register
multiple user IDs and usernames.
Memo
For the following procedure, a text editor will be used for
the example.
1 Start the text editor.
2 Enter details in the order of login name,
user ID, and username, and separate
these with commas.
3 The file should be saved in a CSV format.
4 Launch the Print Job Accounting Client
utility.
Mac OS X Utilities
- 131 -
Useful Software
7
5 Select [Import] from the [File] menu.
6 Select the CSV file created in procedure
3 and click [Open].
7 Click on [Save].
8 Enter the password and click on [OK].
9 Quit Print Job Accounting Client.
Changing User ID and Username.
You can use this utility to change the username
and user ID.
1 Launch the Print Job Accounting Client
utility.
2 Select the user you want to change and
click on [Edit].
3 Enter the new user ID and username and
click on [Save].
4 Click on [Save].
5 Enter the password and click on [OK].
6 Quit Print Job Accounting Client.
Deleting User IDs and Usernames
You can use this utility to delete a username and
user ID.
1 Launch the Print Job Accounting Client
utility.
2 Select the user you want to delete and
click [Delete].
3 Click on [Save].
4 Enter the password and click on [OK].
5 Quit Print Job Accounting Client.
Network Card Setup
You can use the Network Card Setup to configure
the network.
In order to use Network Card Setup, TCP/IP
needs to be activated.
Note
Configure the TCP/IP settings.
Even when connected using a wireless LAN, the displayed
MAC address becomes the MAC address of the wired LAN.
Configure the IP Address
1 Launch Network Card Setup.
Reference
"Installing Utilities" P. 106
2 Select the machine.
3 Select [IP Address...] from the
[Printer] menu.
4 Configure the settings as required and
click [Save].
5 Enter the password and click on [OK].
- The default password is the last 6 alphanumerical
digits of the Mac address.
- The password is case sensitive.
6 Click on [OK] to activate the new settings.
Restart the machine network card.
Configure Web settings
You can launch the webpage, and configure the
machine network settings.
Enabling Web Settings
1 Select [Web Page Settings...] from the
[Printer] menu.
2 Select [Enable] and click on [Set].
3 Enter your password into [Enter
Password] and click on [OK].
- The default password is the last 6 alphanumerical
digits of the MAC MAC address.
- The password is case sensitive.
4 Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
Mac OS X Utilities
- 132 -
Opening a Webpage
1 Launch Network Card Setup.
2 Select the machine.
3 Select [View Printer Web Pages] from
the [Printer] menu .
The webpage will restart, and the machine status
page will be displayed.
Quit Network Card Setup
1 Select [Quit] from the [File] menu.
Network Scanner Setup Tool
When carrying out a scan through the network for
the first time with Mac OS X, launch the network
scanner setup tool to set the connection target.
It is not necessary to set the connection target
after the first time.
Memo
For the following procedure, Adobe Photoshop CS3 will be
used as an example. The details may differ depending on
the application you are using.
The Network Scanner Setup Tool is installed at the same
time as the scanner driver.
The Network Scanner Setup Tool can be launched from
[Network Scanner Setup Tool] within [Applications]>
[OKIDATA]>[Scanner].
Carry out a network scan for the
first time. (MB441, MB451, MB451w,
MB461, MB471, MB471w, MB491,
MB491+, ES4161 MFP, ES4191 MFP,
MPS4200mb)
1
Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
When the device's Scan Mode settings are in
"Simple Mode", please proceed to Step 4.
Otherwise, please carry out step 2 and 3.
2 Press the <SCAN> key.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
4 Launch Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
5 Select [Import] from [File], and select
[OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x
Network].
6 When carrying out a network scan for the
first time, a dialog box informing you
that the connection selection tool is
being started will be displayed, so click
[OK].
7 Select the connection destination from
the [Scan Settings] dialog box, register
information as required and click on
[OK].
8 From [File] within Adobe Photoshop
CS3, select [Import] and select [OKI
MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x Network].
A window is displayed.
9 Click the scan button .
Reading will start.
10 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
[Photoshop].
Carry out a network scan for the
first time. (MB461+LP, MB491+LP,
MPS4700mb)
1
Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
When the device's Scan Mode settings are in
"Simple Mode", please proceed to Step 4.
Otherwise, please carry out step 2 and 3.
2 Press the <SCAN> key.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
4 Launch Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
5 Select [Import] from [File], and select
[OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x Network].
6 When carrying out a network scan for the
first time, a dialog box informing you
that the connection selection tool is
being started will be displayed, so click
[OK].
7 Select the connection destination from
the [Scan Settings] dialog box, register
information as required and click on [OK].
8 From [File] within Adobe Photoshop
CS3, select [Import] and select [OKI
OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x Network].
A window is displayed.
9 Click the scan button .
Reading will start.
10 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
[Photoshop].
OK
OK
- 133 -
Network Settings
8
8. Network Settings
This chapter explains network settings for your machine.
Network Setting Items
This section explains the items that can be set with network functions.
You can print the network setting list and check the current network settings by pressing the
<SETTING> key and selecting [Reports] > [System] >[Network Information] on the control panel.
Reference
For details on how to print the network settings list, refer to "Printing Reports" P. 73.
You can change the network settings from your machine's web page, Configuration Tool, TELNET, and
Network Card Setup. For the menus available for each utility, refer to the following tables.
Device Information
TCP/IP
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Contact
Name -
Administrator
Contact to
Admin
- - - (NULL) Specifies the contact information of the
system administrator up to 225
characters.
Device
Name
Device
Name
- - - OKI-(machine
name)-(last
six digits of
MAC address)
Sets the machine name up to 31
characters.
Short
Device
Name
Short
Device
Name
---(machine
name)-(last
six digits of
MAC address)
Sets the short machine name up to 15
characters.
Location Location - - - (NULL) Sets the machine location up to 255
characters.
Asset
Number
Asset
Number
- - - (NULL) Sets the arbitrary number to manage
your machine up to 32 characters.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
IP Address
Set
IP Address
Set
IP Address
Request
Method
IP Address
Request
Method
Get IP
address
AUTO Specifies the method of assigning an IP
address.
IP Address IP Address IP Address IP Address IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Sets an IP address.
Subnet
Mask
Subnet
Mask
Subnet
Mask
Subnet
Mask
Subnet
Mask
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Sets a subnet mask.
Network Setting Items
- 134 -
NetWare
Gateway
Address
Gateway
Address
Default
Gateway
Address
Default
Gateway
Address
Default
Gateway
Address
0.0.0.0 Sets a gateway address.
DNS Server
(Primary)
DNS Server
(Pri.)
- - - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the IP address of the primary
DNS server.
Be sure to specify this item when you
use a domain name to specify the
SMTP/POP/LDAP server.
DNS Server
(Secondary)
DNS Server
(Sec.)
- - - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
Be sure to specify this item when you
use a domain name to specify the
SMTP/POP/LDAP server.
Dynamic
DNS
Dynamic
DNS
- - - Disable Specifies whether to register the
information to the DNS server when a
setting has been changed.
Domain
Name
Domain
Name
- - - (NULL) Sets the domain name the machine
belongs to.
WINS Server
(Primary)
WINS
Server (Pri.)
- - - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the name or IP address of the
WINS server (for Windows only).
WINS
Server
(Secondary)
WINS
Server
(Sec.)
- - - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the name or IP address of the
WINS server (for Windows only).
Scope ID Scope ID - - - (NULL) Specifies the Scope ID for WINS. From
1 to 223 characters can be used.
Windows Windows - - - Disable Specifies whether to use the auto-
discovery function of Windows.
Macintosh Macintosh - - - Enable Specifies whether to use the auto-
discovery function of Macintosh.
Device
Name
Printer
Name
---OKI-(machine
name)-(last six
digits of MAC
address)
Specifies the rule for displaying the
machine name when the auto-detect
function is enabled.
IPv6 IP Version - - - Disable Specifies whether to use IPv6.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Print Mode - - - - Print Server Specifies how to use the machine, as
a print server, or as a remote printer.
Connection
method
NetWare
Mode
- - - NDS+Bindery Specifies the NetWare priority mode.
Communication
protocol
TCP or IPX - - - IPX Select IPX or TCP/IP to be used on
NetWare.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Network Setting Items
- 135 -
Network Settings
8
EtherTalk (MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
Print Server
Name
Print Server
Name
- - - OKI-(machine
name)-(last
six digits of
MAC address)-
PS
Specifies the print server name up to
31 characters. This value must be
identical to the one specified in the file
server.
Printer Name Printer
Name
- - - OKI-(machine
name)-(last
six digits of
MAC address)-
PR
Specifies the machine name when you
use a remote printer. This value must
be identical to the one specified in the
file server.
Frame Type Frame Type - - - Auto
Negotiation
Specifies the frame type the machine
uses on NetWare.
Bindery Mode - - - - Enable Specifies whether to use the bindery
mode.
When you access NetWare 3.12 or the
bindery network of NetWare 6.0, 5.0,
or 4.1, enable the bindery mode.
When you access NDS of NetWare 6.0,
5.0, or 4.1, disable the bindery mode.
File Serve
Names
File Server
Name #1-8
- - - (NULL) Specifies the name of the file server
up to 47 characters. You can specify
up to 8 servers.
Password for
File Servers
Password - - - (NULL) Sets a password to log in to the file
server up to 31 characters.
You must specify this item when you
set a password on the file server for
your machine.
Job Polling Rate Job Polling
Time (sec.)
- - - 4 (seconds) Sets the interval to access the print
job queue.
Tree NDS Tree - - - (NULL) Specifies the NDS tree name up to 31
characters. Specify the tree name to
which the file server belongs.
Context NDS
Context
- - - (NULL) Specifies the NDS context name up to
77 characters. Specify the context
name to which the print server
belongs.
Job Timeout Job Timeout
(sec.)
- - - 10 (seconds) Specifies the time until a port is freed
after the last print job was accepted.
Print Server
Names
Print Sever
Name #1-8
- - - (NULL) Specifies the name of the print server
to access up to 47 characters. You can
specify up to 8 servers.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Zone Name Zone Name - - - * Specifies the EtherTalk zone name up to
32 characters.
Printer
Name
Printer
Name
---(machine
name)
Specifies the EtherTalk printer name up
to 31 characters.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Network Setting Items
- 136 -
NBT/NetBEUI
E-mail Send Settings
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Short
Device
Name
Short
Device
Name
---
(machine
name)-
(last six digits
of MAC
address)
Sets the name to be identified on
NetBIOS over TCP/NetBEUI up to 15
characters.
In Windows it is displayed in the
PrintServer group of the Network
Computer.
Workgroup
Name
Workgroup
Name
- - - PrintServer Sets the work group name to be
displayed on Windows network
computers up to 15 characters.
Master
Browser
Setting
Master
Browser
Setting
- - - Enable Specifies whether to use master
browser.
Comment Comment - - - EthernetBoard
OkiLAN 8500e
Sets a comment up to 48 characters.
It is displayed when Windows Explorer is
in the detailed view.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
SMTP Send SMTP Send - - - Enable Specifies whether to use SMTP (E-mail).
SMTP
Server
SMTP
Server
Name
- - - (NULL) Specifies the SMTP server name. Enter
the domain name or IP address.
Be sure to configure DNS settings if you
enter a domain name.
Device
E-mail
Address
Device
Email
Address
- - - (NULL) Specifies the e-mail address of the
machine.
Authentication
Method
SMTP-Auth
Method
- - - None Specifies whether to perform SMTP
authentication.
SMTP Port
Number
SMTP Port
Number
- - - 25 Specifies the SMTP port number.
SMTP User
ID
SMTP
Server User
ID
- - - (NULL) Sets a user ID for SMTP authentication.
SMTP
Password
SMTP
Server
Password
- - - (NULL) Sets a password for SMTP
authentication.
SMTP
Encryption
SMTP
Encryption
Algorithm
- - - None Specifies the method to encrypt the
SMTP (E-mail send protocol).
-POP Server
Name
- - - (NULL) Specifies the POP server name. Enter
the domain name or IP address. Be sure
to configure DNS settings if you enter a
domain name.
-POP Port
Number
- - - 110 Specifies the port number to access the
POP server.
Network Setting Items
- 137 -
Network Settings
8
POP User ID POP Server
UserID
- - - (NULL) Sets a user ID to access the POP server.
POP
Password
POP Server
Password
- - - (NULL) Sets a password to access the POP
server.
POP
Encryption
POP
Encryption
Algorithm
- - - None Specifies the method to encrypt POP
communication.
APOP
Support
Use APOP - - - Disable Specifies whether to use APOP.
Attached
Information
Device
Model
Attached
Info Device
Model
- - - ON Specifies whether to list the machine
model name on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
Network
Interface
Attached
Info
Network
Interface
- - - ON Specifies whether to list the network
interface name on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
Serial
Number
Attached
Info Serial
Number
- - - ON Specifies whether to list the machine
serial number on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
Asset
Number
Attached
Info Asset
Number
- - - OFF Specifies whether to list the machine
asset number on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
Device
Name
Attached
Info Device
Name
- - - OFF Specifies whether to list the device
name of the machine on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
Location
Attached
Info
Location
- - - OFF Specifies whether to list the machine
location on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
IP Address
Attached
Info IP
Address
- - - ON Specifies whether to list the IP address
of the machine on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
MAC
Address
Attached
Info MAC
Address
- - - OFF Specifies whether to list the MAC
address of the machine on an alert
e-mail.
Attached
Information
Short
Device
Name
Attached
Info Short
Device
Name
- - - OFF Specifies whether to list the short device
name of the machine on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
Device URL
Attached
Info Device
URL
- - - OFF Specifies whether to list the web page
URL of the machine on an alert e-mail.
Comment Comment
Li
n
e 1-4
- - - (NULL) Sets a comment to add to an alert
e-mail. You can enter up to 63
characters in a line. A maximum of 4
lines can be specified.
Reply-To-
Address
Reply-To
Address
- - - (NULL) Specifies the e-mail address used to
reply to e-mails. Specify the e-mail
address of the network administrator.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Network Setting Items
- 138 -
E-mail Receive Settings
E-mail Alert Settings
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Use Protocol POP or
SMTP
- - - Disable Specifies whether to use the e-mail
receive function. Select the protocol to
use.
POP Server
Name
POP Server - - - (NULL) Specifies the POP server name. Enter
the domain name or IP address. Be sure
to configure DNS settings if you enter a
domain name.
POP User ID POP Server
UserID
- - - (NULL) Sets a user ID to access the POP server.
POP
Password
POP Server
Password
- - - (NULL) Sets a password to access the POP
server.
APOP
Support
Use APOP - - - Disable Specifies whether to use APOP.
POP Port
Number
POP Port
Number
- - - 110 Specifies the port number to access the
POP server.
POP
Encryption
POP
Encryption
Algorithm
- - - None Specifies the method to encrypt POP
communication.
POP Receive
Interval
Mail Polling
Time (min)
- - - 5 (minutes) Specifies the interval to access the POP
server to receive e-mails.
Domain
Filter
Domain
filter
- - - Disable Specifies whether to use domain
filtering.
E-mail from
following
listed
domains.
Filter Policy - - - Accept Specifies whether to accept or block
e-mail from the specified domains.
Domain 1-5 Domain 1-5 - - - (NULL) Specifies the domain to apply domain
filtering.
SMTP
Receive Port
Number
Port Number - - - 25 Specifies the port number to access the
machine via SMTP.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Address 1-5 Email
Address 1-5
- - - (NULL) Specifies the destination e-mail address.
You can specify up to 5 destinations.
Error
Notification
Method
Notify Mode
1-5
- - - Notification
upon
occurrence of
an error
Specifies when to notify you of an error.
E-mail
Notification
Interval
Email Alert
Interval
(Hours) 1-5
- - - 24 (Hours) Specifies the interval of the e-mail alert.
Effective only when periodic notification
is specified.
Network Setting Items
- 139 -
Network Settings
8
Consumable
Warning
Consumable
Warning
EVENT 1-5
- - - Immediate Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding consumables.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Consumable
Warning
Consumable
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Enable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding consumables.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Consumable
Error
Consumable
Error EVENT
1-5
- - - Immediate Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding consumables. Effective
only when notification upon occurrence
is selected.
Consumable
Error
Consumable
Error
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Enable Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding consumables. Effective
only when periodic notification is
selected.
Maintenance
Unit
Warning
Maintenance
Unit
Warning
EVENT 1-5
- - - 2H0M Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the maintenance unit.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Maintenance
Unit
Warning
Maintenance
Unit
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Enable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the maintenance unit.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Maintenance
Unit Error
Maintenance
Unit Error
EVENT 1-5
- - - Immediate Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the maintenance unit.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Maintenance
Unit Error
Maintenance
Unit Error
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Enable Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the maintenance unit.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Paper
Supply
Warning
Paper
Supply
Warning
EVENT 1-5
- - - 0H15M Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding paper. Effective only
when notification upon occurrence is
selected.
Paper
Supply
Warning
Paper
Supply
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Enable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding paper. Effective only
when periodic notification is selected.
Paper
Supply Error
Paper
Supply Error
EVENT 1-5
- - - Immediate Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding paper. Effective only
when notification upon occurrence is
selected.
Paper
Supply Error
Paper
Supply Error
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Enable Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding paper. Effective only
when periodic notification is selected.
Printing
Paper
Wa
r
ning
Printing
Paper
Warning
EVENT 1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding paper feed. Effective
only when notification upon occurrence
is selected.
Printing
Paper
Warning
Printing
Paper
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding paper feed. Effective
only when periodic notification is
selected.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Network Setting Items
- 140 -
Printing
Paper Error
Printing
Paper Error
EVENT 1-5
- - - 2H0M Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding paper feed. Effective
only when notification upon occurrence
is selected.
Printing
Paper Error
Printing
Paper Error
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Enable Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding paper feed. Effective
only when periodic notification is
selected.
Storage
Device
Warning
Storage
Device
EVENT 1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the storage device.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Storage
Device
Warning
Storage
Device
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Enable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the storage device.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Print Result
Warning
Print Result
Warning
EVENT 1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding an error that affects
the print results. Effective only when
notification upon occurrence is selected.
Print Result
Warning
Print Result
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Enable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding an error that affects
the print results. Effective only when
periodic notification is selected.
Print Result
Error
Print Result
Error EVENT
1-5
- - - 2H0M Specifies whether to notify you of an
error that affects the print results.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Print Result
Error
Print Result
Error
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Enable Specifies whether to notify you of an
error that affects the print results.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Interface
Anomaly
Warning
Interface
Warning
EVENT 1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the interface.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Interface
Anomaly
Warning
Interface
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the interface.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Interface
Anomaly
Error
Interface
Error EVENT
1-5
- - - 2H0M Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the interface. Effective
only when notification upon occurrence
is selected.
Interface
Anomaly
Error
Interface
Error
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Enable Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the interface. Effective
only when periodic notification is
selected.
Security
Warning
Se
cu
rity
Warning
EVENT 1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the security function.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Security
Warning
Security
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the security function.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Network Setting Items
- 141 -
Network Settings
8
SNMP
Scanner
Warning
Scanner
Warning/
Error EVENT
1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the scanner. Effective
only when notification upon occurrence
is selected.
Scanner
Warning
Scanner
Warning/
Error
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the scanner. Effective
only when periodic notification is
selected.
Scanner
Error
Scanner
Warning/
Error EVENT
1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the scanner. Effective
only when notification upon occurrence
is selected.
Scanner
Error
Scanner
Warning/
Error
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the scanner. Effective
only when periodic notification is
selected.
Fax Warning FAX
Warning/
Error EVENT
1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the fax function.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Fax Warning FAX
Warning/
Error
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the fax function.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Fax Error FAX
Warning/
Error EVENT
1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the fax function.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Fax Error FAX
Warning/
Error
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Disable Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the fax function.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Other Error Other Error
EVENT 1-5
- - - 2H0M Specifies whether to notify you of other
errors. Effective only when notification
upon occurrence is selected.
Other Error Other Error
PERIOD 1-5
- - - Enable Specifies whether to notify you of other
errors. Effective only when periodic
notification is selected.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Use SNMP
Settings
SNMP
Version
- - - SNMPv3+v1 Specifies the SNMP version.
User Name User Name - - - root Sets the user name in SNMPv3 up to 32
characters.
Authentication
Settings
Passphrase
Auth
Passphrase
- - - (NULL) Sets the password to create an
authentication key for SNMPv3 packet
authentication. From 8 to 32 characters
can be used.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Network Setting Items
- 142 -
SNMP Trap
- Auth Key - - - (NULL) Sets the authentication key for SNMPv3
packet authentication in HEX code.
Maximum number of characters depends
on the algorithm you select.
Authentication
Settings
Algorithm
Auth
Algorithm
- - - MD5 Specifies the algorithm for SNMPv3
packet authentication.
Encryption
Settings
Passphrase
Privacy
Passphrase
- - - (NULL) Sets the password to create an
authentication key for SNMPv3 packet
encryption. From 8 to 32 characters can
be used.
- Privacy Key - - - (NULL) Sets the authentication key for SNMPv3
packet encryption in HEX code. Sixteen
octets (32 characters of HEX code) can
be used.
Encryption
Settings
Algorithm
Privacy
Algorithm
- - - DES Specifies the algorithm for SNMPv3
packet encryption. You cannot change
this value.
New SNMP
Read
Community
Read
Community
- - - public Sets the read community for SNMPv1 up
to 15 characters.
New SNMP
Write
Community
Write
Community
- - - public Sets the write community for SNMPv1
up to 15 characters.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Printer Trap
Community
Name
Prn-Trap
Community
- - - public Sets the community name for a printer
trap up to 31 characters.
Address 1-5 TCP #1-5
Trap
Address
- - - 0.0.0.0 Specifies a trap destination in TCP/IP.
You can specify up to 5 destinations.
Trap Enable
1-5
TCP #1-5
Trap Enable
- - - Disable Specifies whether to use a printer trap in
TCP #1-5.
Printer
Reboot 1-5
TCP #1-5
Printer
Reboot Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when the machine has
rebooted.
Receive
Illegal Trap
1-5
TCP #1-5
Receive
Illegal Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to use a trap when a
community name other than the one set
in [Printer Trap Community Name
Set] is used to access the machine.
Online 1-5 TCP #1-5
Online Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message every time the machine comes
online.
Offline 1-5 TCP #1-5
Offline Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message every time the machine goes
offline.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Network Setting Items
- 143 -
Network Settings
8
IPP
Paper Out
1-5
TCP #1-5
Paper Out
Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when the machine runs out of
paper.
Paper Jam
1-5
TCP #1-5
Paper Jam
Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when the paper jams.
Cover Open
1-5
TCP #1-5
Cover Open
Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message every time the machine's cover
opens.
Printer Error
1-5
TCP #1-5
Printer Error
Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when an error occurs.
IPX IPX Trap
Net/Address
- - - 00000000:00
0000000000
Specifies a trap destination in IPX.
Specify the value as "(network
address):(node address)". You can
specify only one address.
IPX Trap
Enable
IPX Trap
Enable
- - - Disable Specifies whether to use a printer trap in
IPX.
IPX Online IPX Online
Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message every time the machine comes
online.
IPX Offline IPX Offline
Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message every time the machine goes
offline.
OPX Paper
Out
IPX Paper
Out Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when the machine runs out of
paper.
IPX Paper
Jam
IPX Paper
Jam Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when the paper jams.
IPX Cover
Open
IPX Cover
Open Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message every time the machine's cover
opens.
IPX Printer
Error
IPX Printer
Error Trap
- - - Disable Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when an error occurs.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
IPP - - - - Disable Specifies whether to use IPP.
Message from
Administrator
- - - - (NULL) Enter a message in a language that
accords to the language selected in
[Character Encoding] and
[Language].
Charset - - - - UTF-8 Specifies a character encoding to use
when submitting settings to the
machine.
Language - - - - EN-US Specifies the language used in settings
that contain text strings.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Network Setting Items
- 144 -
Windows Rally
IEEE802.1X
Authentication - - - - NONE Specifies whether to use
authentication when performing IPP
printing.
User Name
1-50
----(NULL)If you select [BASIC] in
[Authentication], specify a user
name up to 63 characters.
Password
1-50
----(NULL)If you select [BASIC] in
[Authentication], specify a password
up to 16 characters.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
WSD Print WSD Print - - - Enable Specifies whether to use WSD Print.
WSD Scan WSD Scan - - - Enable Specifies whether to use WSD Scan.
LLTD LLTD - - - Enable Specifies whether to use LLTD.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
IEEE802.1X 802.1X - - - Disable Specifies whether to use IEEE802.1X.
EAP Type EAP Type - - - EAP-TLS Specifies the EAP method.
EAP User EAP User - - - (NULL) Specifies the user name to be used for
EAP up to 64 characters.
EAP
Password
EAP
Password
- - - (NULL) Specifies the password to be used for
EAP up to 64 characters. Effective only
when [PEAP] is selected in [EAP Type].
Client
Certificate
Setting
Use SSL
Certificate
---Use SSL/TLS
certificate for
EAP
authentication
.
Specifies whether to use an SSL/TLS
certificate in IEEE802.1X authentication.
It is unavailable when no SSL/TLS
certificate is installed. Effective only
when EAP-TLS is selected.
CA
Certification
Setting
Authenticat
e Server
- - - Authenticate
Server
Specifies whether to use a CA certificate
to authenticate the certificate sent from
the RADIUS server.
- EAP retry - - - 3 Specifies the number of retries of
IEEE802.1X authentication.
- EAP timeout - - - 40 Specifies the timeout value to wait for
the server response during IEE802.1X
authentication.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Network Setting Items
- 145 -
Network Settings
8
Secure Protocol Server Settings (Kerberos)
LDAP Server Settings
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Domain Domain
Name
- - - (NULL) Specifies the realm name for Kerberos
authentication.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
LDAP Server LDAP Server - - - (NULL) Specifies the LDAP server name. Enter
the domain name or IP address. Be sure
to configure DNS settings if you enter a
domain name.
Port Number LDAP Port
Number
- - - 389 Specifies the port number of the LDAP
server.
Timeout LDAP
Timeout
- - - 30 Specifies the timeout value to wait for
the LDAP server response.
Max. Entries Max Entry - - - 100 Specifies the maximum number of
search results.
Search Root Search Root - - - (NULL) Specifies where to search (BaseDN) in
LDAP search.
User Name
1
User Name
1
- - - cn Specifies the attribute name searched
for as the user name.
User Name
2
User Name
2
---sn
User Name
3
User Name
3
---givenName
Mail Address Mail Address - - - mail Specifies the attribute name searched
for as the user name.
Additional
Filter
Additional
Filter
- - - (NULL) Specifies additional filters for LDAP
search.
Method Authenticati
on Method
- - - Anonymous Specifies the authentication method for
LDAP server.
User ID Authenticati
on User ID
- - - (NULL) Sets a user ID to access the LDAP
server.
Password Authenticati
on User
Password
- - - (NULL) Sets a password to access the LDAP
server.
Encryption Encryption
Algorithm
- - - None Specifies the method to encrypt LDAP
communication.
Network Setting Items
- 146 -
Mail Server Settings
Security
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
SMTP
Server
SMTP
Server
Name
- - - (NULL) Specifies the SMTP server name. Enter
the domain name or IP address.
Be sure to configure DNS settings if you
enter a domain name.
SMTP Port
Number
SMTP Port
Number
- - - 25 Specifies the SMTP port number.
SMTP
Encryption
SMTP
Encryption
Algorithm
- - - None Specifies the method to encrypt the
SMTP (E-mail) send protocol.
POP3 Server POP Server - - - (NULL) Specifies the POP server name. Enter
the domain name or IP address.
Be sure to configure DNS settings if you
enter a domain name.
POP3 Port
Number
POP Port
Number
- - - 110 Specifies the port number to access the
POP server.
POP
Encryption
POP
Encryption
Algorithm
- - - None Specifies the method to encrypt POP
communication.
Authentication
Method
SMTP-Auth
Method
- - - None Specifies whether to perform SMTP
authentication.
SMTP User
ID
SMTP Server
User ID
- - - (NULL) Sets a user ID for SMTP authentication.
SMTP
Password
SMTP
Server
Password
- - - (NULL) Sets a password for SMTP
authentication.
POP User ID POP Server
UserID
- - - (NULL) Sets a user ID to access the POP server.
POP
Password
POP Server
Password
- - - (NULL) Sets a password to access the POP
server.
APOP
Support
Use APOP - - - Disable Specifies whether to use APOP.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
- TCP/IP - - - Enable Specifies whether to use TCP/IP.
NetBEUI NetBEUI - - - Disable Specifies whether to use NetBEUI.
NetBIOS
over TCP
NetBIOS
over TCP
- - - Enable Specifies whether to use NetBIOS over
TCP.
NetWare NetWare - - - Disable Specifies whether to use NetWare.
EtherTalk EtherTalk - - - Disable Specifies whether to use EtherTalk
(MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/
MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191
MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only).
Network Setting Items
- 147 -
Network Settings
8
IP Filtering
Web (Port
Number:
80)
WEB
(Default
Port 80)
Device
Settings
(Web) -
Enable
Printer
Settings
(Web)
Web Page
Settings
Enable Specifies whether to use the web page
to access the machine.
Web Web (IPP) - - - 80 Specifies the port number to access the
web page of the machine.
IPP (Port
Number:
631)
IPP (Default
Port 631)
- - - Disable Specifies whether to use IPP.
Telnet Telnet - - - Disable Specifies whether to use TELNET to
access the machine.
FTP FTP - - - Disable Specifies whether to use FTP to access
the machine.
SNMP SNMP - - - Enable Specifies whether to use SNMP to access
the machine.
POP POP3
(E-Mail)
- - - Disable Specifies whether to use POP3.
POP POP - - - 110 Specifies the port number for POP3.
SNTP SNTP - - - Disable Specifies whether to use SNTP.
Local Ports Local Ports - - - Enable Specifies whether to use a unique
protocol.
-SMTP
(E-Mail)
- - - Enable Specifies whether to use SMTP send.
SMTP Send SMTP Send - - - 25 Specifies the port number for SMTP
send.
SMTP
Receive
SMTP
Receive
- - - 25 Specifies the port number for SMTP
receive.
Change
Network
Password
Password Password
Change
Password
Change
Change
Password
(last six digits
of MAC
address)
Sets a new administrator password up to
15 characters. The password is case-
sensitive. This password is used only
when you change settings from the
utilities. The administrator password set
in the machine cannot be changed from
this item.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
IP Filtering IP Filtering - - - Disable Specifies whether to use IP filtering.
Be sure to configure the following
settings of this category when you
enable IP filtering. If you do not, you
cannot access the machine via TCP/
IP.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Network Setting Items
- 148 -
MAC Address Filtering
Start Address
1-10
Start
Address
#1-10
- - - 0.0.0.0 Specifies IP addresses that are
allowed to access the machine. You
can specify an individual address or
an address range.
End Address
1-10
End Address
#1-10
- - - 0.0.0.0
Printing
1-10
IP Address
Range
#1-10 Print
- - - Disable Specifies whether to allow print jobs
from specified IP addresses.
Configuration 1-
10
IP Address
Range
#1-10
Configuration
- - - Disable Specifies whether to allow settings
changes from specified IP addresses.
Administrator's
IP Address
setting
Admin IP
Address
- - - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the administrator IP
address automatically. Only this
address can always access the
machine.
When the administrator accesses the
machine via a proxy server, all access
via the proxy server is allowed.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
MAC Address
Filtering
MAC
Address
Filtering
- - - Disable Specifies whether to use MAC address
filtering. This function is used to
control access from MAC addresses.
Be sure to configure the following
settings of this category when you
enable MAC address filtering. If not,
you cannot access the machine via a
network.
Communication
from the
following MAC
Addresses
MAC
Address
Access
- - - Accept Specifies whether to accept or block
the access from specified MAC
addresses.
MAC Address
1-50
MAC
Address
#1-50
- - - 00:00:00:00:
00:00
Specifies MAC addresses to which the
filtering is applied.
Administrator's
MAC Address
setting
Admin MAC
Address
- - - 00:00:00:00:
00:00
Specifies the administrator MAC
address automatically. Only this
address can always access the machine.
When the administrator accesses the
machine via a proxy server, all access
via the proxy server is allowed.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Network Setting Items
- 149 -
Network Settings
8
Encryption (SSL/TLS)
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
HTTP/IPP HTTP/IPP - - - OFF Specifies whether to encrypt HTTP/IPP
communication.
HTTP/IPP
Cipher
Strength
HTTP/IPP
Cipher
Strength
- - - Standard Specifies whether to encrypt HTTP/IPP
communication.
FTP Receive FTP Receive - - - OFF Specifies whether to encrypt reception
via FTP.
FTP Receive
Cipher
Strength
FTP Receive
Cipher
Strength
- - - Standard Specifies the strength of encryption of
reception via FTP.
SMTP
Receive
SMTP
Receive
- - - OFF Specifies whether to encrypt reception
via SMTP.
SMTP
Receive
Cipher
Strength
SMTP
Receive
Cipher
Strength
- - - Standard Specifies the strength of encryption of
reception via SMTP.
Select
Certificate
Type
----Use self-
signed
Certificate
Creates a self-signed certificate. In
addition, creates a CSR to send to a
certificate authority and installs a
certificate issued by a certificate
authority.
Common
Name
----(Machine's IP
Address)
The machine's IP address is specified
when you create a self-signed
certificate.
Organization - - - - (NULL) Specifies the official name of the
organization you belong to up to 64
characters.
Organizational
Unit
- - - - (NULL) Specifies the name of the sub-group
(e.g. branch) you belong to up to 64
characters.
Locality - - - - (NULL) Specifies the name of the locality you
are in up to 128 characters.
State/
Province
- - - - (NULL) Specifies the name of the state or
province you are in up to 128
characters.
Country/
Region
- - - - (NULL) Specifies the country code or region
code in 2 characters.
Key
Exchange
Method
- - - - RSA Specifies the key method for encrypted
communication.
Key Size - - - - 1024 bit Specifies the key size for encrypted
communication.
Network Setting Items
- 150 -
IPSec
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
IPSec IPSec - - - Disable Specifies whether to use IPSec.
IP Address
1-50
- - - - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the host allowed to
communicate by IPSec.
IKE
Encryption
Algorithm
- - - - 3DES-CBC Specifies the IKE encryption method.
IKE Hash
Algorithm
- - - - SHA-1 Specifies the IKE hash method.
Diffie-
Hellman
Group
- - - - Group2 Specifies the Diffie-Hellman group to be
used for "Phase 1 Proposal".
LifeTime - - - - 28800
(seconds)
Specifies the lifetime of "ISAKMP SA".
Pre-shared
Key
- - - - (NULL) Specifies the pre-shared key.
Key PFS - - - - NOPFS Specifies whether to use Key PFS
(Perfect Forward Secrecy).
Key PFS
Diffie-
Hellman
Group
- - - - None Specifies the Diffie-Hellman group used
by Key PFS.
ESP - - - - Enable Specifies whether to use ESP
(Encapsulating Security Payload).
ESP
Encryption
Algorithm
- - - - 3DES-CBC Specifies the encryption algorithm for
ESP.
ESP
Authentication
Algorithm
- - - - SHA-1 Specifies the authentication algorithm
for ESP.
AH - - - - Enable Specifies whether to use AH
(Authentication Header).
AH
Authentication
Algorithm
- - - - SHA-1 Specifies the authentication algorithm
for AH.
LifeTime - - - - 3600
(seconds)
Specifies the lifetime of "IPSec SA".
Network Setting Items
- 151 -
Network Settings
8
Maintenance
Time Setup (SNTP Settings)
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Reset
Network
Card
Reset
Network
Card
- - - Disable Use to reboot Network Card
Restore
Network
Card to
Factory
Defaults
Restore
Network
Card to
Factory
Default
- - - Disable Use to restore the network settings to
factory default.
Network
Scale
LAN Scale
Setting
- - - Normal Use the factory default value. [SMALL]
is recommended only when you use a
small LAN to which a few computers are
connected.
Network PS-
Protocol
- - - - RAW Specifies the protocol for communication
of PostScript data via the network.
HEX Dump HEX Dump
Mode
- - - NO Specifies whether to show the received
print data in 16 hexadecimal notation.
Restarting the machine disables this
mode.
HUB Link
Setting
HUB Link
Setting
---Auto
Negotiation
Specifies the speed and method of
communication between the hub and the
machine.
TCP ACK - - - - Type1 Change setting when printing takes time
extremely.
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Time Setup - - - - Manual Specifies the method to set date an time
(i.e., manually or automatically).
SNTP Server
(Primary)
NTP Server
(Pri.)
- - - (NULL) Specifies the IP address of the primary
SNTP server in order to get the current
time.
SNTP Server
(Secondary)
NTP Server
(Sec.)
- - - (NULL) Specifies the IP address of the
secondary SNTP server in order to get
the current time.
Time Zone Local Time
Zone
- - - -12:00 Specifies the time difference between
GMT and your local time.
Network Setting Items
- 152 -
Direct Print
Item
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati
on Tool/
Network
Setting
Plug-in
Network Card Setup
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Paper Tray - - - - Tray 1 Specifies the tray to be used for print
jobs.
Copies - - - - 1 Specifies the number of copies.
Collate - - - - Enable Specifies whether to collate the output.
Fit to page - - - - Enable Specifies whether to fit the document
size to the paper size.
Duplex
printing
- - - - (NULL) Specifies whether to and how to bind a
duplex job.
Page Select - - - - Disable Specifies the pages to be printed.
PDF
Password
- - - - Disable Select this item and enter the necessary
password when you print an encrypted
PDF file.
Configuring the wireless LAN from the Web Page (MB451w/MB471w only)
- 153 -
Network Settings
8
Configuring the wireless LAN from the Web Page
(MB451w/MB471w only)
This section explains how to set the wireless LAN settings change the network settings from the
machine's web page.
To access the machine's web page, your computer must meet the following conditions:
TCP/IP is enabled.
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later, Safari 3.0 or later, or Firefox 3.0 or later is installed.
Memo
Ensure that the security setting of the web browser is set to a middle level, or that cookies are allowed.
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, it is necessary to log in as the administrator. The factory default administrator password is
"aaaaaa".
Reference
Some of the following settings can be performed on other utilities. For details, refer to "Network Setting Items" P. 133.
In order to configure from the Web, it is necessary to have completed the settings for wired or wireless
network connection.
Note
If WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP is set for the security method, the settings from the [IEEE802.1x] menu need to be set beforehand.
IEEE802.1X settings
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
The user name is "root", and the default password
is "aaaaaa".
2 Click the [IEEE802.1X] tab.
Using EAP-TLS:
a) Select [Disable] for [IEEE802.1X].
b) Select [EAP-TLS] for the [EAP Type].
c) Enter a user name in [EAP User].
d) Select [Do not use SSL/TLS Certificate
for EAP authentication] and then click
[Import].
e) Enter the file name of the certificate.
Only a PKCS#12 file can be imported.
f) Enter the password of the certificate and
then click [OK].
g) Select [Authenticate Server] and then
click [Import].
h) Enter the file name of the CA certificate
and then click [OK].
i) Specify the certificate issued by the
certificate authority, which is the
certificate authority from which the
RADIUS server obtained the certificate. A
PEM, DER, and PKCS#7 file can be
imported.
j) Click [Send].
k) When the main unit comes online, proceed
to "Wireless LAN settings".
Note
When [WPA-EAP] or [WPA2-EAP] is set for the
security method and [EAP-TLS] is selected as the
[EAP Type], [Not authenticate Server] cannot be
selected.
Using PEAP:
a) Select [Disable] for [IEEE802.1X].
b) Select [PEAP] for the [EAP Type].
c) Enter a user name in [EAP User].
d) Enter the password in [EAP Password].
e) Select [Authenticate Server] and then
click [Import].
f) Enter the file name of the CA certificate
and then click [OK].
g) Specify the certificate issued by the
certificate authority, which is the
certificate authority from which the
RADIUS server obtained the certificate. A
PEM, DER, and PKCS#7 file can be
imported.
h) Click [Send].
i) When the main unit comes online, proceed
to "Wireless LAN settings".
Configuring the wireless LAN from the Web Page (MB451w/MB471w only)
- 154 -
Wireless LAN settings
1 Log in as the administrator.
2 Click the [Network Manager] tab.
3 Click the [Wireless LAN Settings]
menu.
4 In the [Basic Settings] field under
[Network Connection], select
[Wireless].
Memo
The default is "Disabled".
5 Enter the SSID name of the wireless AP
that you want to connect to in [SSID].
Memo
"default" is set as the default.
6 In the [Security method], select the
same security setting as the wireless AP
that you want to connect to.
Depending on the selected security
method, configure one of the settings
from (1) to (3) below.
When [Disable] is selected, press the
[Send] button at the bottom left of the
Web screen. (Not recommended for
security reasons.)
Memo
The default is "Disable".
(1) When WEP is selected:
a) When [WEP] is selected, [WEP KEY] is
displayed.
Enter the same KEY as the WEP KEY set
for the wireless AP that you want to
connect to.
Note
There is not setting for the WEP KEY index. The WEP
KEY index communications with the wireless AP as 1.
Memo
After entering the KEY, the key is displayed as "*"
symbols for security reasons.
(2) When WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is
selected:
a) When [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK] is
selected, [Encryption type] and [Pre
Shared Key] are displayed.
b) In [Encryption type], select the
encryption type (TKIP or AES) set in the
wireless AP that you want to connect to.
Memo
The default is "TKIP".
Depending on the model of wireless AP, the mixed
TKIP/AES may be supported. In this case, we
recommend using AES.
c) In [Pre Shared Key], enter the same KEY
as the Pre Shared KEY set for the wireless
AP that you want to connect to.
Memo
After entering the KEY, the key is displayed as "*"
symbols for security reasons.
Configuring the wireless LAN from the Web Page (MB451w/MB471w only)
- 155 -
Network Settings
8
(3) When WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP is
selected:
a) When [WPA-EAP] or [WPA2-EAP] is
selected, [Encryption type] is displayed.
b) In [Encryption type], select the
encryption type (TKIP or AES) set in the
wireless AP that you want to connect to.
7 When all of the settings for basic settings
and security settings are completed,
press the [Send] button at the bottom
left of the Web screen, and the settings
are reflected. It may take up to a minute
to connect to the wireless AP. If the
connection fails, either reconfigure the
wireless settings from the operation
panel, or switch to wired LAN from the
operation panel, and reconfigure the
wireless settings from the Web.
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
- 156 -
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
This section explains how to change the network settings from the machine's web page.
To access the machine's web page, your computer must meet the following conditions:
TCP/IP is enabled.
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later, Safari 3.0 or later, or Firefox 3.0 or later is installed.
Memo
Ensure that the security setting of the web browser is set to a middle level, or that cookies are allowed.
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, it is necessary to log in as the administrator. The factory default administrator password is
"aaaaaa".
Reference
Some of the following settings can be performed on other utilities. For details, refer to "Network Setting Items" P. 133.
Encrypting Communication by
SSL/TLS
You can encrypt communication between your
computer and the machine. Communication is
encrypted by SSL/TLS in the following cases:
Change of the machine settings from the web page
IPP printing
Direct print
LDAP search
Send data via SMTP or FTP
Print received data via SMTP or FTP
Creating a Certificate
You can create a certificate on the web page. The
following two certificates are available:
A self-signed certificate.
A certificate created by a certificate authority.
Note
If you change the machine IP address after you create a
certificate, the certificate becomes invalid. Be sure not to
change the machine's IP address after creating a
certificate.
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager] >
[Security] > [Encryption (SSL/TLS)].
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
Memo
The machine's IP address is set to [Common Name].
5 Click [Send].
6 Check the settings and click [OK].
7 If you are creating a self-signed
certificate, follow the on-screen
instructions and close the web page.
Then go to "Enabling Encryption".
If you are getting a certificate issued by
a certificate authority, go to step 8.
8 Follow the on-screen instructions to send
a CSR to a certificate authority.
9 Click [OK].
10 Follow the on-screen instructions to
install a certificate from the certificate
authority.
11 Click [Send].
12 Go to "Enabling Encryption".
Enabling Encryption
After creating a certificate, perform the following
procedure to enable encryption.
When you change the settings from the web
page to enable encryption, communication is
encrypted immediately after that change has
been made.
1 Perform "Creating a Certificate" steps 1
to 3 to enter the encryption screen.
2 Select [Enable] for the desired protocol
on which encryption is applied.
3 Click [Encryption Strength Settings].
4 Select the encryption strength and click
[OK].
5 Click [Send].
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
- 157 -
Network Settings
8
Opening the Web Page
Memo
Ensure to enable the protocol on which encryption is
applied in "Enabling Encryption" P. 156.
1 Launch a web browser.
2 Enter "https://your machine's IP
address" in the URL address bar and
then press the <Enter> key.
IPP Printing
IPP printing allows you to transmit your print job
data from your computer to the machine via the
Internet.
Enabling IPP Printing
IPP printing is disabled by factory default. To
perform IPP printing, enable IPP first.
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager] > [IPP].
4 Select [Enable].
5 Click [Send].
Setting Up Your Machine As an IPP
Printer (for Windows Only)
Add your machine to your computer as an IPP
printer.
1 Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers] > [Add a printer].
2 On the [Add Printer] wizard, select
[Add a network, wireless or
Bluetooth printer].
3 In the list of available printers, select
[The printer I am looking for is not
listed].
4 Select [Select a shared printer by
name].
5 Enter "http://your machine's IP address/
ipp" or "http://your machine's IP
address/ipp/lp" and then click [Next].
6 Click [Have Disk].
7 Insert the software DVD-ROM into the
computer.
8 Enter the following value in [Copy
from], and then click [Use].
- For PCL driver, "D:\Drivers\EN\PCL".
- For PS driver, "D:\Drivers\EN\PS".
- For PCL XPS driver, "D:\Drivers\EN\XPS".
Memo
In the above examples, the DVD-ROM drive is setup
as the D drive.
9 Select the NFL file and click [Open].
10 Click [OK].
11 Select a model and click [OK].
12 Click [Next].
13 Click [Finish].
14 Print the test page after installation is
complete.
Setting Up Your Machine As an IPP
Printer (for Mac OS X Only)
Add your machine to your computer as an IPP
printer.
1 Insert the software DVD-ROM into the
computer and install the driver.
Reference
"User's Manual Basic"
2 Select "System Preferences" from the
Apple menu.
3 Click [Print and Fax].
4 Click [ + ].
5 Click the [IP] tab.
6 From[Protocol], select [IPP (Internet
Printing Protocol)].
7 Enter the machine's IP address in
[Address].
8 Enter "ipp/Ip" in [Queue].
9 Click [Add].
10 Click [Continue].
11 Confirm that the machine is registered in
[Print and Fax].
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
- 158 -
Performing IPP Printing
Memo
The following steps are explained using NotePad as an
example. The steps and menus may differ depending on
the application you use.
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select the IPP printer you created from
[Select Printer], and then click [Print].
Encrypting Communication by
IPSec
You can encrypt communication between your
computer and the machine.
The communication is encrypted by IPSec. When
IPSec is enabled, encryption is applied for all the
applications using IP protocols.
You can specify up to 50 hosts by their IP
addresses. When a host that is not registered
tries to access the machine, it is rejected. When
you try to access a host that is not registered,
the attempt is invalid.
Be sure to configure the machine in advance,
before configuring your computer.
Memo
You must have a pre-shared key readied in advance.
Configuring Your Machine
In order to enable IPSec, your machine must first
be configured from the web page.
Note
When you enable IPSec, the communication that is to and
from a host not specified in this procedure is rejected.
Memo
Be sure to make a note of the values you specify in these
steps. They are necessary when you configure the IPSec
settings on your computer.
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager] >
[Security] > [IPSec].
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
Memo
Either [ESP] or [AH] must be enabled in the
configuration for "Phase2 Proposal".
5 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Note
If you were unable to set up IPSec because of an
inconsistency between the parameters that were specified,
you will be unable to access the web page. In this case,
either disable IPSec from the control panel of the machine,
or initialize the network settings.
Configuring Your Computer
Memo
Be sure to configure the machine in advance, before
configuring your computer.
1 Click [Start] and select [Control Panel]>
[
System and Security
]> [
Administrative
Tools].
2 Double-click [Local Security Policy].
3 On the [Local Security Policy] window,
click [IP Security Policy (Local
Computer)].
4 From the [Action] menu, select [Create
IP Security Policy].
5 On the [IP Security Policy Wizard],
click [Next].
6 Enter a [Name] and a [Description]
and then click [Next].
7 Select the [Activate the default
response rule (earlier versions of
Windows only)] check box and then
click [Next].
8 Select [Edit Properties] and then click
[Finish].
9 On the IP security policy properties
window, select the [General] tab.
10 Click [Settings].
11 On the [Key Exchange Settings]
window, enter a value (minutes) for
[Authenticate and generate a new
key after every].
Note
Specify the same value as [Lifetime] specified in the
configuration for "Phase1 Proposal" in "Configuring
Your Machine". Although [Lifetime] is specified in
seconds, enter a value in minutes for this step.
12 Click [Methods].
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
- 159 -
Network Settings
8
13 On the [Key Exchange Security
Methods] window, click [Add].
14 Specify [Integrity algorithm],
[Encryption algorithm], and [Diffie-
Hellman group].
Note
Select the same value that was specified in [IKE
Encryption Algorithm], [IKE Hush Algorithm],
and [Diffie-Hellman group] at the time of
configuration for "Phase1 Proposal" in "Configuring
Your Machine" P. 158.
15 Click [OK].
16 On the [Key Exchange Security
Methods] window, click [OK].
17 On the [Key Exchange Settings]
window, click [OK].
18 On the IP security policy properties
window, select the [Rules] tab.
19 Click [Add].
20 On the [Security Rule Wizard], click
[Next].
21 On the [Tunnel Endpoint] screen,
select [This rule does not specify a
tunnel and then click [Next].
22 On the [Network Type] screen, select
[All Network Connections] and then
click [Next].
23 On the [IP Filter List] screen, click
[Add].
24 On the [IP Filter List] window, click
[Add].
25 On the [IP Filter Wizard], click [Next].
26 On the [IP Filter Description and
Mirrored Property] screen, click
[Next].
27 On the [IP Traffic Source] screen, click
[Next].
28 On the [IP Traffic Destination] screen,
click [Next].
29 On the [IP Protocol Type] screen, click
[Next].
30 Click [Finish].
31 On the [IP Filter List] window, click
[OK].
32 On the [Security Rule Wizard], select
the new IP filter from the list and then
click [Next].
33 On the [Filter Action] screen, click
[Add].
34 On the [Filter Action Wizard], click
[Next].
35 On the [Filter Action Name] screen,
enter a [Name] and a [Description]
and then click [Next].
36 On the [Filter Action General Options]
screen, select [Negotiate security] and
then click [Next].
37 On the [Communicating with
computers that do not support
IPsec] screen, select [Do not allow
unsecured communication] and then
click [Next].
38 On the [IP Traffic Security] screen,
select[Custom] and then click
[Settings].
39 On the [Custom Security Method
Settings] window, configure the settings
and then click [OK].
Note
Configure the AH and ESP settings to the same
settings as configured for the "Phase2 Proposal" in
"Configuring Your Machine" P. 158.
40 On the [IP Traffic Security] screen,
click [Next].
41 Select [Edit Properties] and then click
[Finish].
42 On the filter action properties window,
select [Use session key perfect
forward secrecy (PFS)] if you want to
enable Key PFS.
43 Select [Accept unsecured
communication, but always respond
using IPsec] if you perform IPSec
communication by the IPv6 global
address.
44 Click [OK].
45 Select the new filter action and then click
[Next].
46 On the [Authentication Method]
screen, select the authentication method
you want and then click [Next].
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
- 160 -
47 Click [Finish].
48 On the IP security policy properties
window, click [OK].
49 On the [Local Security Policy] window,
select the new IP security policy.
50 From the [Action] menu, select
[Assign].
51 Check that for the new IP security policy,
[Policy Assigned] is displayed as
[Yes].
52 Click [X] on the [Local Security Policy]
screen.
Controlling Access Using IP
Address (IP Filtering)
You can control access to the machine using the
IP address. You can set whether to allow
configuration or printing from the IP addresses
specified. By factory default, IP filtering is
disabled.
Note
Be sure to specify the correct IP address. If you specify a
wrong IP address, you cannot access the machine using
the IP protocol.
When you enable IP filtering, the access to and from a host
that is not specified in these steps is rejected.
Memo
You can use only IPv4 for IP filtering.
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager]>
[Security]>[IP Filtering].
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
Note
If nothing is registered in[Administrator's IP
Address to Register], you may not be able to access
the machine depending on the specified IP address
range.
If you use a proxy server, [Your Current Local
Host/Proxy IP Address] and the IP address of your
host may not match.
5 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Control Access Using MAC
Address (MAC Address
Filtering)
You can control access to the machine using the
MAC address. You can allow or reject the access
from the specified MAC addresses.
Note
Be sure to specify the correct MAC address. If you specify
the wrong MAC address, you cannot access the machine
via a network.
Memo
You cannot specify to accept or to reject for each address
individually.
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager]>
[Security]>[MAC Address Filtering].
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
Note
If nothing is registered in [Administrator's MAC
Address to Register], you may not be able to access
the machine depending on the specified MAC address.
If you use a proxy server, [Your Current Local
Host/Proxy MAC Address] and the MAC address of
your host may not match.
5 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Error Notification by E-mail
(E-mail Alert)
You can set the machine to send an error
notification e-mail when an error occurs. You can
set when to be notified:
On a periodical basis
Only when an error occurs
Configuring Your Machine
You can configure the settings for e-mail alert
using the web page.
Memo
If you have configured the settings for Scan To Mail / Scan
To Internet Fax that are described in the "User's Manual
Basic", the server configuration is complete.
When you specify a domain name in [SMTP Server],
configure the DNS server in the [TCP/IP] setting.
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
- 161 -
Network Settings
8
You need to set the mail server to allow the machine to
send an e-mail. For details on the mail server setting, refer
to your network administrator.
If you use Internet Explorer 7, be sure to configure the
settings below before you send a test mail. In the browser,
select [Tools] > [Internet Options], then click [Custom
Level] on the [Security] tab. Then select [Enable] in
[Allow websites to prompt for information using
scripted windows].
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager]>[E-mail]>
[Send Settings].
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
5 Select [Set detail of the SMTP
Protocol].
6 If necessary, you can configure
[Security Settings], [Configure
attached information], and [Others].
7 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Regular Alert
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager]>[E-mail]>
[Alert Settings].
4 Enter an e-mail address to receive the
alerts.
5 Click [Setting] for the specified address.
[Copy] is useful when you want to apply the alert
conditions to another address..
6 Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
7 Click [OK].
8 Click [View a summary of current
configuration] to check the current
settings, and then click [X] to close the
window.
You can also check the current settings of up to
two addresses on the main window. Select the
desired addresses to check from the list box.
9 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Memo
If there is no error specified, the alert e-mail is not sent.
Alert At Time of Error Occurrence
1 Perform steps 1 to 6 in "Regular Alert".
When an error or warning is selected to require
notification, a window will display to specify the
time between error occurrence and sending the
alert.
2 Specify the time to sending of an error
alert and then click [OK].
If you specify a longer time, you are only notified
of persisting errors.
3 Click [OK].
4 Click [View a summary of current
configuration] to check the current
settings, and then click [X] to close the
window.
You can also check the current settings of up to
two addresses on the main window. Select the
desired addresses to check from the list box.
5 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Using SNMPv3
When you use the SNMP manager that supports
SNMPv3, the management of the machine is
encrypted by SNMP.
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager]>[SNMP]>
[Setting].
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
5 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Memo
Your machine has an SNMP agent. You can confirm and
change the machine settings by a commercially available
SNMP agent. For the MIB of the machine, refer to the
software DVD-ROM and check the "README" file in the
[Misc] > [MIB] folder.
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
- 162 -
Using IPv6
Your machine supports IPv6. The machine
obtains the IPv6 address automatically. You
cannot set the IPv6 address manually.
The machine supports the following protocols:
For Printing:
-LPR
-IPP
- RAW (Port9100)
-FTP
For Configuration:
-HTTP
-SNMPv1/v3
-Telnet
Operation is confirmed under specific conditions
for the following applications.
*1) To specify a host name, edit the host's
file or access via the DNS server.
*2) On Telnet, when only IPv6 is enabled
you cannot specify a host name by the
DNS server.
*3) You cannot specify a host name when
you use a link local address to access.
*4) Enter an IPv6 address enclosed with
square brackets.
Note
To use IPv6 on Windows XP, install IPv6.
Enabling IPv6
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network]>[TCP/IP].
4 Select [Enable] for [IPv6].
5 Click [Submit].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Checking IPv6 Address
The OPv6 address is automatically assigned.
1 Select [View Info].
2 Select [Network]>[TCP/IP].
Memo
When the global address is displayed only as zeros, it may
be an error due to the router being used.
Reference
You can also check the IPv6 address in the network report
from the machine by pressing the <SETTING> key and
then selecting [Report Print] > [View Info] > [Network
Information]. For details on the report and how to print
it, refer to "Printing Reports" P. 73.
Using IEEE802.1X
Your machine supports the IEEE802.1X
authentication.
Be sure to configure your machine and your
computer in advance before performing the
following steps.
Reference
For details on the initial setup and the IP address, refer to
the User's Manual Basic.
Configuring Your Machine for
IEEE802.1X
Using PEAP
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager]>
[IEEE802.1X].
4 Select [Enable] for [IEEE802.1X].
5 Select [PEAP] for [EAP Type].
6 Enter a user name in [EAP User].
7 Enter a password in [EAP Password].
Protocol
OS
Application
Condi
tion
LPD Windows 7
Windows Vista
Windows XP
LPR (Command
Prompt)
*1, 2, 3
Port9100 Windows 7
Windows Vista
LPRng *1, 2, 3
FTP Windows 7
Windows Vista
Windows XP
FTP (Command
Prompt)
*1, 2, 3
Mac OS X FTP (Terminal) *1, 2, 3
HTTP Windows XP Internet Explorer
6.0
*1, 2, 3
Mac OS X Safari (2.0-
v412.2)
*1, 2,
3, 4
Teln et Windows 7
Windows Vista
Windows XP
Teln et (Co mm an d
Prompt)
*1, 2, 3
Mac OS X Telnet (Terminal) *1, 2, 3
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
- 163 -
Network Settings
8
8 Select [Authenticate Server] and then
click [Import].
9 Enter the file name of the CA certificate
and then click [OK].
Specify the certificate issued by the certificate
authority, which is the certificate authority from
which the RADIUS server obtained the certificate.
A PEM, DER, and PKCS#7 file can be imported.
10 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
11 When the standby screen appears on the
machine, hold down the power switch for
about a second to turn off the power.
12 Go to "Connecting Your Machine to
Authentication Switch" P. 163.
Using EAP-TLS
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager]>
[IEEE802.1X].
4 Select [Enable] for [IEEE802.1X].
5 Select [EAP-TLS] for [EAP Type].
6 Enter a user name in [EAP User].
7 Select [Do not use SSL/TLS
Certificate for EAP authentication]
and then click [Import].
8 Enter the file name of the certificate.
Only a PKCS#12 file can be imported.
9 Enter the password of the certificate and
then click [OK].
10 Select [Authenticate Server] and then
click [Import].
11 Enter the file name of the CA certificate
and then click [OK].
Specify the certificate issued by the certificate
authority, which is the certificate authority from
which the RADIUS server obtained the certificate.
A PEM, DER, and PKCS#7 file can be imported.
12 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
13 When the standby screen appears on the
machine, hold down the power switch for
about a second to turn off the power.
14 Go to "Connecting Your Machine to
Authentication Switch" P. 163.
Connecting Your Machine to
Authentication Switch
1 Make sure that the machine is turned off.
2 Connect an Ethernet cable to the
network interface port.
3 Connect the Ethernet cable to the
authentication port of an authentication
switch.
4 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power.
5 Set up the machine.
Reference
For details on the initial setup, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
Configuring LDAP Server
Reference
For details on the LDAP server and encryption setting,
refer to your network administrator.
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager]>[LDAP
Server Setting].
4 Enter the domain name or IP address of
the LDAP server in [LDAP Server].
5 Enter the port number of the LDAP
server in [Port Number].
6 Specify a value of time-out to wait for
the search results in [Timeout].
7 Specify a value for the maximum number
of entries into the search results in
[Max. Entries].
8 Specify a BaseDN to access the LDAP
server in [DN Name].
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
- 164 -
9 Enter attribute names to be searched for
as the user name in [User Name].
Be sure to specify a value for [Name 1].
10 Enter an e-mail address to be searched
for in [Mail Address].
11 If necessary, specify a search condition
in [Additional Filters].
12 Select the authentication method you
want in [Method].
Note
When you select [Anonymous] or [Simple], user
authentication using LDAP fails. You need to select
[Digest-MD5] or [Secure Protocol] if you configure
the LDAP server for user authentication.
Memo
When you select [Digest-MD5], you need to
configure the DNS server setting.
When you select [Secure Protocol], you need to
configure the DNS server and the secure protocol
server settings.
13 If you do not select [Anonymous] in
step 12, specify the user ID and
password to log in to the LDAP server.
14 Select the encryption method in
[Encryption].
15 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Configuring Secure Protocols
Authentication using the Kerberos server is
available when you access the LDAP server. In
order to use the secure protocol, be sure to
complete the SNTP and DNS server settings.
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager]>[Secure
Protocol Server Setting].
4 Enter a realm name in [Domain Name].
5 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Printing Without Printer Driver
(Direct Print)
Printing PDF Files
You can print PDF files without installing the
printer driver. Specify the file you want to print
on the web page and sent it to the machine.
Memo
Additional RAM memory may be necessary depending on
the PDF file.
Printing may not be correct depending on the PDF file.
When printing is not correct, open the file with Adobe
Reader and then print.
1 Access the machine's web page.
2 Click [Direct Print].
3 Select [Web Printing].
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
5 Check the settings and then click [OK].
The data is sent to the machine and the printing is
started.
Configuring Server to Print Files
Attached to E-mails
You can print a file that the machine receives as
an attachment to an e-mail.
Memo
Up to 10 files can be printed. The maximum size for each
file is 8 MB.
PDF, JPEG, and TIFF files can be printed.
Additional RAM memory may be necessary depending on
the PDF file.
Printing may not be correct depending on the PDF file.
When printing is not correct, open the file with Adobe
Reader and then print.
Configuration for POP
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager]>[E-mail]>
[Receive Settings].
4 Select [POP3] and then click [To
STEP2].
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
- 165 -
Network Settings
8
5 Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
Memo
Be sure to specify the correct settings for your mail
server. If you enable APOP when your mail server does
not support the APOP protocol, e-mails may not be
received correctly.
When you specify a domain name for the mail server,
configure the DNS server in the [TCP/IP] setting.
6 Click [Send].
Memo
If the POP server does not support the SSL encryption, e-
mails may not be received correctly.
Configuration for SMTP
1
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network Manager]>[E-mail] >
[Receive Settings].
4 Select [SMTP] and then click [To
STEP2].
5 Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
6 Click [Send].
Changing Settings on EtherTalk (for Mac OS
only) (MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/
MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
Note
EtherTalk cannot be used with Mac OS X 10.6 or later.
Changing EtherTalk Machine Name
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network]>[EtherTalk].
4 Enter a new name in [Printer Name].
5 Click [Submit].
Changing EtherTalk Zone
1 Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2 Select [Admin Setup].
3 Select [Network]>[EtherTalk].
4 Enter a new zone name in [Zone
Name].
5 Click [Submit].
Note
Be sure to specify a zone within the same segment.
Other Operations
- 166 -
Other Operations
This section explains how to initialize the network settings and how to setup your machine and computer
to use DHCP.
Initializing Network Settings
Note
This procedure initializes all the network settings.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press to select [Admin Setup] and
then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press to select [Network Menu] and
then press .
6 Check that [Network Setup] is selected
and then press .
7 Press to select [Factory Defaults]
and then press .
8 Check that [Execute] is selected and
then press .
9 On the confirmation screen, press or
to select [Yes] and then press .
The network card reboots to initialize the settings.
Using DHCP
You can obtain an IP address from the DHCP
server.
Note
You must be authorized as the administrator.
The network system may go down if you enter an incorrect
IP address.
Memo
You can obtain an IP address from the BOOTP server.
Configuring DHCP Server
DHCP assigns an IP address to each host on the
TCP/IP network.
Note
The machine must have a static IP address if you want to
print via a network. For details on how to assign a static IP
address, refer to the manual of your DHCP server.
Memo
The following OSes are supported:
- Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, and
Windows Server 2003
The following steps are explained using Windows Server
2008 as an example. The steps and menus may differ
depending on the OS you use.
1 Click [Start] and select
[Administrative Tools]>[Server
Manager].
If [DHCP] is already shown in
[Administrative Tools] continue to step 8.
2 Select [Add Roles] on the [Roles
Summary] area.
3 On the [Add Roles Wizard], click
[Next].
4 Select [DHCP Server] and then click
[Next].
5 Follow the on-screen instructions and
configure the settings as necessary.
6 On the [Confirm Installation
Selection] screen, check the settings
and click [Install].
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Other Operations
- 167 -
Network Settings
8
7 When the installation finishes, click
[Close].
8 Click [Start] and select
[Administrative Tools]>[DHCP] to
launch the [DHCP] wizard.
9 On the DHCP list, select a server to use.
10 From the [Action] menu, select [New
Scope].
11 On the [New Scope Wizard], follow the
on-screen instructions and configure the
settings as necessary.
Memo
Be sure to configure the default gateway settings.
On the [
Activate Scope] screen, select [Yes,
I want to activate the scope now
].
12 Click [Finish].
13 Select the new scope from the DHCP list
and then select [Reservations].
14 From the [Action] menu, select [New
Reservation].
15 Configure the settings.
16 Click [Add].
17 Click [Close].
18 From the [File] menu, select [Exit].
Configuring Your Machine
The following explains how to configure your
machine to use DHCP/BOOTP.
Note that since the DHCP/BOOTP protocol is
enabled by factory default, you do not have to
perform this procedure.
Memo
The following steps are explained using Network Card
Setup as an example. The steps and menus may differ
depending on the software you use.
1 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power.
2 Turn on your computer and insert the
software DVD-ROM.
3 Click [Run setup.exe].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
4 Select a model and then click [Next].
5 Read the license agreement and click
[I Agree].
6 Select [Device Configuration]>
[Network Card Setup].
7 Select your machine from the list.
8 From the [Setting] menu, select
[Printer Setting].
9 Enter the IP address and then click [OK].
10 Enter the password at [Enter
Password] and then click [OK].
- The factory default password is the last six digits
of the MAC address.
- The password is case-sensitive.
11 Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
The machine restarts to enable the new settings.
The machine status icon changes to red during the
restart. The status icon changes to green when
the machine has restarted and the new settings
have been enabled.
12 From the [File] menu, select [Exit] to
close the Network Card Setup.
- 168 -
9. Settings for Auto Delivery and
Transmission Data Save Functions
(for MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191
MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
This chapter explains how to configure settings for auto delivery and transmission data save functions.
This machine has the auto delivery and transmission data save functions. These functions can be used
for faxes, Internet faxes, and e-mails. You can configure the settings for these functions using the web
browser utility for the machine.
Note
Even when connected using a wireless LAN, the displayed MAC address becomes the MAC address of the wired LAN.
Memo
The default administrator password of the machine is "aaaaaa".
Internet Explorer 8 is used here as an example. The details may differ depending on the browser you are using.
Reference
For details on the web browser utility, refer to "Webpage" P. 107.
Forwarding Received Data As Digital Data (Auto
Delivery)
This chapter explains the auto delivery function and how to configure settings for it.
The auto delivery function forwards received data automatically to specified destinations. You can
specify up to five e-mail addresses and one network folder as destinations.
You can use this function for received faxes, Internet faxes, and files attached to e-mails. The data is
forwarded as a PDF or TIFF file depending on the file format of the received data.
You can register up to 100 sets of forwarding destinations for the auto delivery function.
Memo
When the fax reception mode is set to [Forward Mode], the data is not automatically delivered by this function.
The received fax is delivered as a PDF file.
If the received file attached to an e-mail is other than a PDF, JPEG, or TIFF file, it is not forwarded.
The body text of received e-mails cannot be forwarded.
The size of data that this function can handle is limited.
If an SD memory card's capacity is insufficient to store a received Internet fax or file attached to an e-mail, auto delivery is not
carried out.
Configuration for the Auto
Delivery Function
Reference
You need to configure the server settings in advance. For
details on how to configure the server settings, refer to the
User’s Manual Basic.
If specifying a network folder, register a profile beforehand.
For details on how to register a profile, refer to the User’s
Manual Basic.
1 Launch your web browser.
2 Enter "http://machine's IP address" in
the address bar and press the <Enter>
key.
Reference
For the machine's IP address, please refer to the
User’s Manual Basic.
Forwarding Received Data As Digital Data (Auto Delivery)
- 169 -
Settings for Auto Delivery and Transmission Data Save
Functions (for MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
9
3 Click [Administrator Login].
4 Enter "admin" in [User Name] and enter
the administrator password in of the
machine in [Password], and then click
[OK].
5 Click [SKIP].
6 Select [Transmission Settings].
7 Click [New] on the [Automated
Delivery Setup] page.
8 Enter a name of your choice in
[Automated Delivery].
9 Select [ON] for [Automated Delivery].
10 Select the check box you require in
[Search field].
Forwarding Received Data As Digital Data (Auto Delivery)
- 170 -
11 Select [OFF] for [Print].
If you select [ON], the received data is printed
out.
12 Configure an e-mail destination.
a) [Click [Edit] in the [E-mail address]
field.
b) Enter a recipient email address and click
[Add].
c) Check that the entered address is listed in
the [Address List] field and then click
[OK].
13 Configure a network folder destination.
a) Click [Edit] in the [Folder].
b) Select a destination from the [Profile
List] and then click [OK].
14 Click on [Submit].
Saving Transmission and Reception Data (Transmission Data Save)
- 171 -
Settings for Auto Delivery and Transmission Data Save
Functions (for MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
9
Saving Transmission and Reception Data
(Transmission Data Save)
This chapter explains the transmission data saving function and how to configure settings for it.
The transmission data save function saves transmitted and received data automatically in a specified
network folder. You can only specify one network folder.
You can use this function for transmitted faxes, Internet faxes, faxserver,files attached to e-mails, and
received faxes, Internet faxes, files attached to e-mails. The data is saved as a PDF or TIFF file
depending on the file format of the original data.
Note
When the following operations are executed,the transmission data save function cannot be performed:
- Real time transmission
- Polling transmission using Fcode bulletin board communication
- Reception using Fcode confidential communication
Memo
The sent or received fax is saved as a PDF file.
If the sent or received file attached to an e-mail is other than a PDF, JPEG, or TIFF file, it is not saved.
The body text of e-mails cannot be saved.
The size of data that this function can handle is limited.
If an SD memory card's capacity is insufficient to store a sent or received Internet fax or file attached to an e-mail, or a sent
faxserver, transmission data is not saved.
Configuration for the
Transmission Data Save
Function
Reference
You need to configure the server settings in advance. For
details on how to configure the server settings, refer to the
User’s Manual Basic.
Register a profile in advance. For details on how to register
a profile, refer to the User’s Manual Basic.
1 Launch your web browser.
2 Enter "http://machine's IP address" in
the address bar and press the <Enter>
key.
Reference
For the machine's IP address, please refer to the
User’s Manual Basic.
3 Click [Administrator Login].
4 Enter "admin" in [User Name] and enter
the administrator password in of the
machine in [Password], and then click
[OK].
Saving Transmission and Reception Data (Transmission Data Save)
- 172 -
5 Click [SKIP].
6 Select [Transmission Settings].
7 Select [Transmission Settings].
8 Click [Edit] for the desired item.
9 Select [ON]
10 Click on [Select Profile List].
11 Select a destination from the [Profile
List] and then click [OK].
12 Click on [Submit].
- 173 -
Troubleshooting
10
10.Troubleshooting
This chapter explains items on the limits of initializing, deleting and updating drivers, and when in sleep
mode.
Initializing
This section explains how to initialize an SD memory card and flash memory, and how to reset the
equipment settings to their defaults.
You can delete data or settings stored on the machine to restore the settings at the time of purchase.
Note
In the default settings, [Initialize] cannot be selected because [Initial Lock] is set to [Enable]. [Set [Initial Lock] to
[Disable] in [Storage Maintenance Setup]. For details on the initial lock, refer to "Management" P. 100.
Memo
[In order to access the [Admin Setup] menu, an administrator password is required. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Initializing an SD memory card (for
MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb Only)
Carry out initialization of an SD card when
inserting a card that has either been used in
other equipment or when it has not been
properly recognized.
An SD memory card is used as a storage for
spooling when copying sectors, saving secure
print/ encrypted print data, form data and
macros. Initialization deletes stored data.
An SD memory card has three partitions. They
are PS, Common, and PCL. When initialized, it is
divided into partitions again. You can also format
particular partitions individually.
Formatting the Entire Area
You can format the entire area of the SD memory
card installed in the machine.
Note
When you initialize all areas of an SD memory card, the
following data is deleted:
- [Stored job data subject to [Secure Print], [Encrypted
Secure Print] or [Store to SD Card].
- Custom demo data
- Font data
1 Press the <SETTING> key
2 Press to select [Admin Setup] and
then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter], and then press .
5 Press to select [Management] and
then press .
6 Press to select [SD Memory Card
Setup] and then press .
7 Check that [Initialize] is selected and
then press .
8 Check that [Execute] is selected and
then press .
A message appears confirming you that
continuing will automatically restart the system.
Select [Yes] to continue.
Formatting a particular partition
You can initialize a particular partition within the
SD memory card's 3 partitions (PS, Common,
and PCL).
Note
When you initialize a partition, the following data is
deleted:
- PS: Font data in PS area
- Common: Job data and demo data stored with [Secure
Print], [Encrypted Secure Print] or [Store to SD
Card].
-PCL: Font data in the PCL area
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press to select [Admin Setup] and
then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter], and then press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Initializing
- 174 -
5 Press to select [Management] and
then press .
6 Press to select [SD Memory Card
Setup] and then press .
7 Press to select [Format Partition]
and then press .
8 Press to select the partition you want
to initialize and then press .
A message appears confirming you that
continuing will automatically restart the system.
Select [Yes] to continue.
Initializing Flash Memory
Flash memory has saved mail templates, etc.,
stored on it.
Use the following steps to initialize.
Note
When you initialize flash memory, the following data is
deleted:
- Custom demo data
- Font data
1 Press the <SETTING> key
2 Press to select [Admin Setup] and
then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter], and then press .
5 Press to select [Management] and
then press .
6 Press to select [Flash Memory
Setup] and then press .
7 Check that [Initialize] is selected and
then press .
8 Check that [Execute] is selected and
then press .
A message appears confirming you that
continuing will automatically restart the system.
Select [Yes] to continue.
Resetting the Machine
Settings
You can return the configured settings to their
default.
Note
When you initialize the equipment settings, the following
data is deleted:
- Stored documents on the Fcode bulletin board
- Fax jobs that have not been sent
- Fax jobs received in the Fcode parent box.
-Registered job macros
- Dialing logs
- E-mail logs
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press to select [Admin Setup] and
then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
4 Select [Enter], and then press .
5 Press to select [Management] and
then press .
6 Press to select [Reset Settings] and
then press .
7 Check that [Execute] is selected and
then press .
A message appears confirming you that
continuing will automatically restart the system.
Select [Yes]to continue.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Deleting or Updating the Drivers
- 175 -
Troubleshooting
10
Deleting or Updating the Drivers
This section explains how to delete or update the drivers you are using.
Note
The procedure and display may differ according to the print driver and version of Windows or Mac OS X you are using.
Deleting a Printer or Fax
Driver
You can uninstall print and fax drivers.
For Windows
Note
You must be logged on as an administrator to complete
this procedure.
Restart the computer before you start removing a driver.
1 Click on [Start] and then select
[Devices and Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and
select [Remove device].
If you have specified multiple printer drivers,
select [Remove device]>[OKI MB491(*)].
*Select the type of driver you want to remove.
3 If a confirmation message appears, click
[Yes].
Note
If a message appears the device is in use, restart the
computer and try again from step 1 to 2.
4 Click [Printer server properties] on
the top bar with one of any icons
selected in [Printers and Faxes].
5 Select the [Drivers] tab.
6 If [Change Driver Settings] is
displayed, click on it.
7 Select the driver you want to remove and
click [Remove].
8 If a message appears asking you
whether to remove the driver only or the
driver and driver package from your
system. Select to remove the driver and
the driver package and then click [OK].
9 If a confirmation message appears, click
[Yes].
10 If the [Remove Driver Package] dialog
box appears, click [Delete]>[OK].
Note
If deletion is rejected, restart the computer, and carry
out procedures 4-10 again.
11 Click [Close] in the [Printer Server
Properties] dialog box.
12 Restart the computer.
For Mac OS X
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.8
1 From the Apple menu, select [System
Preferences].
2
Select [Print & Scan]. (For Mac OS X
10.7 to 10.8)
Select [
Print & Fax
]. (For Mac OS X 10.5
and 10.6)
3 Select the device you want to remove
and then click [-].
If a confirmation message appears, click [Delete
Printer] (for Mac OS X 10.5, this will be [OK]).
4 Close the [Print & Scan] dialog box.
(For Mac OS X 10.7 to 10.8)
Close the [Print & Fax] dialog box. (For
Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6)
5 Insert the software DVD-ROM into the
computer.
6 Double-click [OKI]>[Drivers]>[PS] or
[PCL]>[UnInstaller].
7 Check the model name to be uninstalled,
and click [OK].
8 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
9 Remove the software DVD-ROM from the
computer.
Deleting or Updating the Drivers
- 176 -
For Mac OS X 10.4.0-10.4.11
1 Select [Utilities] from the [Move]
menu.
2 Click on the [Printer Setup Utility] tab.
3 Select the device you want to remove
and click [Delete].
4 Close the [Printer List] dialog box.
5 Uninstall the driver by using the installer.
Reference
For "For Mac OS X 10.5-10.8" P. 175, follow the
procedure in 5-9.
Updating a Printer or Fax
Driver
You can update printer and fax drivers.
For Windows
Note
You must be logged on as an administrator to complete
this procedure.
Restart the computer before you start removing a driver.
1 Click on [Start] and then select
[Devices and Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and
select [Printing preferences].
If you have installed multiple printer drivers,
select [Printer Properties]>[OKI MB491(*)].
*Select the type of driver you want to remove.
3 Click [About] in the [Setup] tab.
For a PS driver, select the [Print Options] tab,
and click on [About].
4 Check the version information and then
click [OK].
5 Delete the driver you want to update.
Note
Delete all the drivers of the same type (PCL, PS, PCL
XPS, and FAX drivers) to ensure updating.
Reference
"Deleting a Printer or Fax Driver" P. 175
6 Install a new driver.
Reference
For details on how to install a driver, refer to the User’s
Manual Basic.
For Mac OS X
1 Delete a driver.
Reference
"Deleting a Printer or Fax Driver" P. 175
2 Install a new driver.
Reference
For details on how to install a driver, refer to the User’s
Manual Basic.
Deleting a Scanner Driver
You can delete scanner drivers.
Note
You must be logged on as an administrator to complete
this procedure.
For Windows
1 Click on [Start], and then select
[Control Panel]>[Uninstall a
program].
2
Select [
OKI MB4x1/ES41x1/MPS42x
Scanner
](for MB441, MB451, MB451w,
MB461, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
ES4161 MFP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb) or
[
OKI MB4x1+LP/MPS47x
Scanner
](for MB461+LP, MB491+LP,
MPS4700mb) and click on [
Uninstall
].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
3 If a confirmation message appears, click
[Yes].
4 Click [Finish] on the [Uninstallation
Complete] screen.
For Mac OS X (MB441, MB451,
MB451w, MB461, MB471, MB471w,
MB491, MB491+, ES4161 MFP,
ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb)
1 From the hard disk, select
[Library]>[Image Capture]>[TWAIN
Data Sources].
2 Depending on the method of connection
of the machine, the following files will be
deleted.
- Network connection:
OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x Network Driver.ds
Deleting or Updating the Drivers
- 177 -
Troubleshooting
10
-USB connection:
OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x USB Driver.ds
3 Close the [TWAIN Data Sources]
dialog box.
4 From the hard disk, select [Library]>
[Image Capture]>[Devices].
5 Delete the [OKI Scanner].
6 Close the [Devices] dialog box.
7 From the hard disk, select
[Applications]>[Okidata]>[Scanner].
8 Delete network scanner setup tool.
9 Restart the computer.
For Mac OS X(MB461+LP,
MB491+LP, MPS4700mb)
1 From the hard disk, select
[Library]>[Image Capture]>[TWAIN
Data Sources].
2 Depending on the method of connection
of the machine, the following files will be
deleted.
- Network connection:
OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x Network Driver.ds
-USB connection:
OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x USB Driver.ds
3 Close the [TWAIN Data Sources]
dialog box.
4 From the hard disk, select [Library]>
[Image Capture]>[Devices].
5 Delete the [OKI Scanner].
6 Close the [Devices] dialog box.
7 From the hard disk, select
[Applications]>[Okidata]>[Scanner].
8 Delete network scanner setup tool.
9 Restart the computer.
Updating a Scanner Driver
You can update scanner drivers.
Note
You must be logged on as an administrator to complete
this procedure.
For Windows
1 Click on [Start], right click [Computer]
Select [Properties].
2 Click [Device Manager].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
3 Right click the [MB4x1/ES41x1/
MPS42x](for MB441, MB451, MB451w,
MB461, MB471, MB471w, MB491,
MB491+, ES4161 MFP, ES4191 MFP,
MPS4200mb) or [MB4x1+LP/
MPS47x](for MB461+LP, MB491+LP,
MPS4700mb) icon on [Imaging Device]
and click on [Properties].
4 Check the version of the scanner driver
on the [Drivers].
5 Delete the scanner driver.
Reference
"Deleting a Scanner Driver" P. 176
6 Install a new scanner driver.
Reference
For details on how to install a driver, refer to the User’s
Manual Basic.
For Mac OS X
1 Delete the scanner driver.
Reference
"Deleting a Scanner Driver" P. 176
2 Install a new scanner driver.
Reference
For details on how to install a driver, refer to the User’s
Manual Basic.
- 178 -
11.Appendix
This chapter explains print job accounting.
About Using Print Job Accounting
Using print job accounting, you can get the log used for this machine.
Memo
The following explanation is different for different versions of print job accounting.
Note
If print job accounting is included in the machine, it will print in the configuration report when "JobAccounting: ON".
Number of Job Account IDs
and logs that can be used.
The number of job account IDs that can be
registered and the number of logs that can be
saved in the default state is as shown in the
following table:
MB441/MB451/MB451w/MB461/MB461+LP/MB471/
MB471w/MB491+/ES4161 MFP
MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Memo
This value may vary depending on the contents of the logs.
Job
Account
ID
Log
100 About200
Job
Account
ID
Log
100 About 5000
- 179 -
Index
Index
A
ActKey .......................... 43
Address Book ................. 76
Admin Setup .............72, 84
Administrator
Password .............. 102
Advanced Mode .............. 40
Alert Info ..................... 117
Auto Delivery ............... 168
Auto Tray Selection ......... 60
Auto Tray Switching ........ 61
Automatic Redialing ........ 18
Automatically Set the Date
and Time ....... 102, 108
B
Body Text ...................... 34
Booklet Printing .............. 58
Broadcast .................19, 25
Bulletin Box ................... 23
Buzzer Volume ............... 27
C
Canceling a Fax Job......... 31
Collating (Sorting)
Copies .................... 10
Collating Pages ............... 57
Compression Level .......... 38
Computer Fonts .............. 67
Confidential Documents ... 63
Configuration Tool......... 111
Confirm Dial ................... 26
Continuous Scan............. 15
Control Access Using MAC
Adress.................. 160
Controlling Access Using
IP Address ............ 160
Copy Setup .................... 84
Copying ......................... 10
Cover Printing ................ 58
Cover Sheet ................... 30
CSV File......................... 31
Custom Size Paper .......... 53
D
Default Password ............37
Deleting Fax Driver........ 175
Deleting Printer Drivers... 175
Deleting Scanner
Drivers ................. 176
Density ..........................35
Device Information ........ 133
DHCP........................... 166
Direct Print................... 164
Document Type...............35
DSN ..............................46
Duplex Prints ..................55
Duplex Scan ...................15
E
EAP-TLS................153, 163
Easy Setup ............... 72, 82
Edge Erase .....................12
E-mail Address.............. 112
E-mail Alert .................. 160
E-mail Receive Settings
... 138
E-mail Send Settings ..... 136
Emphasizing Fine Lines ....59
Emulation Mode ..............69
Encrypted PDF ................36
Encrypted Secure
Printing...................63
Encryption (SSL/TLS)..... 149
Envelopes ......................51
Error Notification........... 160
EtherTalk ..............135, 165
F
Fax Setup ......................85
Faxing ...........................15
Faxing From a Computer...29
Fcode Box ......................21
Fcode Bulletin Board
Communication ........21
Fcode Confidential
Communication ........21
Fcode Polling ..................22
Fcode Transmission .........21
File Format .....................36
File Name ...................... 35
Forms ........................... 64
Forwarding .................... 28
From Address................. 33
FTP...................... 147, 162
G
Grayscale ...................... 38
Group ........................... 30
I
ID Card Copy ................. 12
ID Check Transmission .... 25
IEEE802.1X ... 144, 153, 162
Initializing an SD
Memory Card .........173
Initializing Flash
Memory.................174
Initializing Network
Settings ................166
Internet Fax Setup.......... 88
Internet Faxing .............. 35
IP Filtering............ 147, 160
IPP ..............................143
IPP Printing...................157
IPSec ................... 150, 158
IPv6.............................162
J
Job Account ID ..............121
Job Macro ...................... 70
JOB MACRO Key ............. 70
K
Kerberos .............. 145, 163
L
Labels ........................... 52
Large Received Images ... 27
LDAP Server .................163
LDAP Server Settings .....145
LPD .............................162
Index
- 180 -
M
MAC Address
Filtering ......... 148, 160
Machine Settings .....74, 174
Mail Server Settings ...... 146
Maintaining Paper Size..... 61
Maintenance................. 151
Management ................ 100
Manual Printing............... 49
Manual Redialing............. 18
Manual Transmission ....... 19
Margin........................... 12
MDN ............................. 46
Memory Capacity ............ 81
Memory Transmission ...... 18
Mixed Size ..................... 14
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray ... 49
Multiple Destination......... 19
N
NBT/NetBEUI................ 136
NetWare ...................... 134
Network Card
Setup ............ 124, 131
Network Configuration ..... 44
Network Extention ........ 127
Network Menu ................ 96
Network Scan ............... 116
Network Scan
Destination ............. 80
Network Scanner
Setup Tool ............ 132
Network Setting..... 117, 133
Network TWAIN .............. 47
N-in-1 ........................... 10
O
OKI LPR Utility......... 68, 127
Operator Panel Language
Setup ................... 122
Overlay Printing.............. 64
P
Page Order..................... 57
Page Splitting ................. 27
Panel Language Setup ... 130
Paper Setup ................... 75
Paper Size ................ 53, 56
PaperPort ................. 39, 41
PC Scan Mode.................47
PDF Print Direct ............ 120
PEAP ....................153, 162
Phone Book .........29, 31, 77
PIN ............................. 114
Power Save Mode .......... 100
Prefixes .........................17
Print From USB
Memory Setup .........91
Print Job Accounting
.............120, 130, 178
Print Quality ...................59
Print Setup .....................91
Printer Fonts...................67
Printing..........................49
Printing E-mail Attached
Files .......................68
Printing to File ................68
Printing with a Password ...63
PrintSuperVision............ 105
Profile.................... 78, 113
PS (Postscript) File ..........68
PS Error .........................69
PS Gamma Adjuster
Utility ................... 109
R
Real Time Transmission....18
Reduction Margin ............27
Reduction Rate ...............27
Remote Receive Number...87
Repeat...........................11
Repeated Printing............65
Reply to Address .............33
Reports.................... 73, 74
Resetting the Machine
Setting ................. 174
Response Time-Out .........28
Ring Response ................28
S
Saving Toner ..................62
Scaling to Pages..............56
Scan Size .......................35
Scan To Fax Server .........32
Scan To Local PC ............ 44
Scan To Remote PC......... 47
Scanner Driver Name ...... 44
Scanner Setup ............... 89
Scanning ....................... 33
Scanning To E-mail ......... 33
Secure Printing............... 63
Secure Protocol .............164
Secure Protocol Server
Settings ................145
Secure Scan Mode .......... 47
Security .......................146
Sender Address .............. 33
Sender Name ................. 16
Sending Faxes
Addressee Group
Lists............... 20
Computer ................. 29
Set Tx Time ................... 20
Simple Mode .................. 39
Sleep Mode...................100
SNMP...........................141
SNMP Trap....................142
SNMPv3 .......................161
SNTP Settings ...............151
Sort .............................. 10
Speed Dial ....................113
Speed Dial List ............... 74
SSID...................... 98, 154
SSL/TLS ............... 149, 156
Store Document
Settings ................. 80
Storing Print Data ........... 65
Sub Address .................. 22
Subject ......................... 33
T
TCP/IP .........................133
Tel Priority Mode ............ 87
TELNET ........................128
Time Setup
(SNTP Settings)......151
Title.............................. 71
Transmission
Data Save .............171
TWAIN Driver................. 39
Index
- 181 -
Index
U
Updating Printer
Drivers ................. 176
Updating Scanner
Drivers ................. 177
Updatingl Fax Driver...... 176
User Install .................. 102
Utilities........................ 104
V
View Information ............ 81
W
Watermark..................... 64
Web Driver Installer ...... 105
Web Page ............. 107, 156
Web Printing ................ 152
WEP ............................ 154
WEP Key........................ 98
WIA .............................. 41
Windows Rally .............. 144
Wireless LAN ................ 153
Wireless Setting.............. 83
WPA Encryption Type ...... 98
WPA Pre-shared Key........ 98
WPA2-EAP ................... 155
WPA2-PSK ................... 154
WPA-EAP ..................... 155
WPA-PSK ..................... 154
- 182 -
www.okiprintingsolutions.com
Oki Data Corporation
4-11-22 Shibaura, Minato-ku,Tokyo
108-8551, Japan
44917202EE Rev5
180


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Oki ES4161 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Oki ES4161 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 7,45 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Oki ES4161

Oki ES4161 User Manual - English - 203 pages

Oki ES4161 User Manual - German - 229 pages

Oki ES4161 User Manual - German - 210 pages

Oki ES4161 User Manual - Dutch - 222 pages

Oki ES4161 User Manual - Dutch - 200 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info